You are on page 1of 281

BSC6900 GSM

V900R013C00

Hardware Description

Issue 09
Date 2013-05-29

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2013. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description About This Document

About This Document

Overview
This document describes the hardware components of the BSC6900. It provides the users with
a detailed and comprehensive reference to the BSC6900.

Product Version
The following table lists the product version related to this document.

Product Name Product Version

BSC6900 V900R013C00

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Installers
l Site operators

Organization
1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description
This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.
2 Physical Structure
The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.
3 Cabinet
The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description About This Document

4 Components of the Cabinet

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray.

5 Subracks

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

6 Boards

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

7 Cables

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

8 LEDs on the Boards

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

9 DIP Switches on Components

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

Conventions
Symbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level or medium level of risk


which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if not


avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not


avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save


time.

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement


important points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description About This Document

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in


boldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.


Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are in
Courier New.

Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by


vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all
items can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by


vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles


are in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"


signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations
The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description About This Document

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt
+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means
the two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations
The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving
the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and


quickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the
pointer to a certain position.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii


1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description..........................................................1
2 Physical Structure..........................................................................................................................8
3 Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................10
3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet...........................................................................................................................................11
3.2 Classification of Cabinets.............................................................................................................................................12
3.3 Components of the Cabinet..........................................................................................................................................13
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................................17
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet................................................................................................................................18
3.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and Cabinet Components..............................................................................18
3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet..............................................................................22
3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR...............................................................................................................28
3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR................................................................................................................32
3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR ..............................................................................................................37

4 Components of the Cabinet.......................................................................................................41


4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................................................43
4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box...........................................................................................43
4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box............................................................................................44
4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power Distribution Box......................................................................45
4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power Distribution Box..........................................................46
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................................................47
4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................................................47
4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box................................................................................................49
4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution Box..........................................................................49
4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power Distribution Box...............................................................50
4.3 Air Defence Subrack....................................................................................................................................................52
4.4 Rear Cable Trough........................................................................................................................................................53
4.5 Cable Tray....................................................................................................................................................................53
4.6 KVM.............................................................................................................................................................................54
4.7 LAN Switch..................................................................................................................................................................55
4.8 GBAM..........................................................................................................................................................................57
4.8.1 Functions of GBAM..................................................................................................................................................58

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).................................................................................................58


4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)...........................................................................................61
4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)...................................................................................................64
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack.............................................................................................................................................67
4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack............................................................................................................67
4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack........................................................................................68

5 Subracks........................................................................................................................................70
5.1 Classification of Subracks............................................................................................................................................71
5.2 Components of the Subrack..........................................................................................................................................71
5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)............................................................................................................73
5.3 Slots in the Subrack......................................................................................................................................................76
5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack...........................................................................................................................................76
5.5 Configuration of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................................79
5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS..........................................................................................................................................79
5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS...........................................................................................................................................81
5.5.3 Configuration of the TCS..........................................................................................................................................82
5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack.......................................................................................................................83

6 Boards............................................................................................................................................84
6.1 DPUa Board..................................................................................................................................................................89
6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board....................................................................................................................................89
6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board...........................................................................................................................................89
6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board.........................................................................................................................................90
6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board............................................................................................................91
6.2 DPUc Board..................................................................................................................................................................91
6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board....................................................................................................................................92
6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board...........................................................................................................................................92
6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board.........................................................................................................................................94
6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board............................................................................................................94
6.3 DPUd Board.................................................................................................................................................................95
6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board...................................................................................................................................95
6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................95
6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board.........................................................................................................................................97
6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board............................................................................................................97
6.4 DPUf Board..................................................................................................................................................................98
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board....................................................................................................................................98
6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................99
6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board........................................................................................................................................101
6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................101
6.5 DPUg Board...............................................................................................................................................................102
6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board.................................................................................................................................102
6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board........................................................................................................................................102
6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board.......................................................................................................................................104

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................104


6.6 EIUa Board.................................................................................................................................................................105
6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board...................................................................................................................................105
6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................105
6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................106
6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board..........................................................................................................................................107
6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................108
6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board...........................................................................................................110
6.7 FG2a Board.................................................................................................................................................................111
6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board...................................................................................................................................111
6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................111
6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board........................................................................................................................................112
6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board.........................................................................................................................................113
6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................114
6.8 FG2c Board.................................................................................................................................................................114
6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board...................................................................................................................................115
6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................115
6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board........................................................................................................................................116
6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board.........................................................................................................................................117
6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................117
6.9 FG2d Board................................................................................................................................................................118
6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board..................................................................................................................................119
6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................119
6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board........................................................................................................................................121
6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board.........................................................................................................................................121
6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................122
6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................................123
6.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board....................................................................................................................123
6.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................123
6.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board..........................................................................................................................124
6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board...........................................................................................................................125
6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board............................................................................................126
6.11 GOUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................126
6.11.1 Functions of the GOUa Board...............................................................................................................................126
6.11.2 Panel of the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................127
6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board.....................................................................................................................................127
6.11.4 Ports on the GOUa Board......................................................................................................................................128
6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board.......................................................................................................128
6.12 GOUc Board.............................................................................................................................................................130
6.12.1 Functions of the GOUc Board...............................................................................................................................130
6.12.2 Panel of the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................131
6.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board.....................................................................................................................................132

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc Board......................................................................................................................................132


6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board.......................................................................................................133
6.13 GOUd Board.............................................................................................................................................................134
6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board...............................................................................................................................135
6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................135
6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board.....................................................................................................................................137
6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board......................................................................................................................................137
6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board.......................................................................................................138
6.14 MDMC Board...........................................................................................................................................................139
6.14.1 Functions of the MDMC Board.............................................................................................................................139
6.14.2 Panel of the MDMC Board....................................................................................................................................140
6.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board...................................................................................................................................140
6.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board.........................................................................................................................141
6.15 OIUa Board...............................................................................................................................................................142
6.15.1 Functions of the OIUa Board.................................................................................................................................142
6.15.2 Panel of the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................142
6.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board......................................................................................................................................143
6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board.......................................................................................................................................144
6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................144
6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................................146
6.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board..................................................................................................................146
6.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................147
6.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board........................................................................................................................148
6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board.........................................................................................................................149
6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board..........................................................................................149
6.17 OMUc Board............................................................................................................................................................151
6.17.1 Functions of the OMUc Board..............................................................................................................................151
6.17.2 Panel of the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................152
6.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board....................................................................................................................................153
6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board.....................................................................................................................................154
6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................154
6.18 PAMU Board............................................................................................................................................................156
6.18.1 Functions of the PAMU Board..............................................................................................................................156
6.18.2 Panel of the PAMU Board.....................................................................................................................................156
6.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board....................................................................................................................................157
6.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board..........................................................................................................................158
6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board......................................................................................................159
6.19 PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................159
6.19.1 Functions of the PEUa Board................................................................................................................................159
6.19.2 Panel of the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................160
6.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board......................................................................................................................................160
6.19.4 Ports on the PEUa Board.......................................................................................................................................161

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................161


6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................164
6.20 PFCU Board.............................................................................................................................................................165
6.20.1 Functions of the PFCU Board...............................................................................................................................165
6.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board............................................................................................................................165
6.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board........................................................................................................167
6.21 POUc Board..............................................................................................................................................................167
6.21.1 Functions of the POUc Board................................................................................................................................168
6.21.2 Panel of the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................168
6.21.3 LEDs on the POUc Board.....................................................................................................................................170
6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board.......................................................................................................................................170
6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board........................................................................................................171
6.22 SCUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................173
6.22.1 Functions of the SCUa Board................................................................................................................................173
6.22.2 Panel of the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................174
6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board......................................................................................................................................176
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board.......................................................................................................................................176
6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board........................................................................................................177
6.23 SCUb Board..............................................................................................................................................................178
6.23.1 Functions of the SCUb Board................................................................................................................................179
6.23.2 Panel of the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................179
6.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board.....................................................................................................................................180
6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board.......................................................................................................................................181
6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board........................................................................................................182
6.24 TNUa Board.............................................................................................................................................................184
6.24.1 Functions of the TNUa Board...............................................................................................................................184
6.24.2 Panel of the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................184
6.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board.....................................................................................................................................185
6.24.4 Ports on the TNUa Board......................................................................................................................................186
6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board........................................................................................................186
6.25 XPUa Board..............................................................................................................................................................187
6.25.1 Functions of the XPUa Board................................................................................................................................187
6.25.2 Panel of the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................188
6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board.....................................................................................................................................189
6.25.4 Ports on the XPUa Board.......................................................................................................................................190
6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board........................................................................................................190
6.26 XPUb Board.............................................................................................................................................................191
6.26.1 Functions of the XPUb Board...............................................................................................................................191
6.26.2 Panel of the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................192
6.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board.....................................................................................................................................193
6.26.4 Ports on the XPUb Board......................................................................................................................................194
6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board........................................................................................................194

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

6.27 WOPB Board............................................................................................................................................................195


6.27.1 Functions of the WOPB Board..............................................................................................................................195

7 Cables...........................................................................................................................................196
7.1 Power Cables..............................................................................................................................................................199
7.2 PGND Cables.............................................................................................................................................................202
7.3 Optical Cable..............................................................................................................................................................204
7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler).................................................................................................................206
7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable................................................................................................................................................209
7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable......................................................................................................................211
7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable......................................................................................................................................214
7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable............................................................................................................216
7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable.......................................................................................................................................................219
7.10 BITS Clock Cable.....................................................................................................................................................221
7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable.............................................................................................................................................223
7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................224
7.13 Straight-Through Cable............................................................................................................................................225
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack.....................................................................................227
7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable...........................................................................................................................................229
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box........................................................................................230
7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable...............................................................................................................................232
7.18 OMU serial cable......................................................................................................................................................233
7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable........................................................................................................................233
7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable...........................................................................................................................................234

8 LEDs on the Boards...................................................................................................................236


8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board..........................................................................................................................................238
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board..........................................................................................................................................238
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board..........................................................................................................................................239
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board...........................................................................................................................................239
8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board..........................................................................................................................................240
8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board............................................................................................................................................241
8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board...........................................................................................................................................241
8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board...........................................................................................................................................242
8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board...........................................................................................................................................243
8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board.............................................................................................................................244
8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board........................................................................................................................................244
8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board........................................................................................................................................245
8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board........................................................................................................................................246
8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board......................................................................................................................................247
8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board.........................................................................................................................................247
8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board...........................................................................................................................248
8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board.......................................................................................................................................249
8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board.......................................................................................................................................249

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description Contents

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board.........................................................................................................................................250


8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board........................................................................................................................................251
8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board.........................................................................................................................................251
8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board........................................................................................................................................252
8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board........................................................................................................................................253
8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board........................................................................................................................................254
8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board........................................................................................................................................254

9 DIP Switches on Components................................................................................................256


9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack.........................................................................................................................................257
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board...............................................................................................................................259
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board..............................................................................................................................262
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board...............................................................................................................................262
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board..............................................................................................................................263
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board.................................................................................................................................266

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware


Description

This chapter describes the changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description.

09 (2013-05-29)
This is the ninth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.9.5 Technical Specifications The maximum packet forwarding rate (UL+DL) is added
of the FG2d Board in Table 2 Specifications of the board processing
6.13.5 Technical Specifications capability.
of the GOUd Board

Compared with issue 08 (2013-01-28), this issue does not exclude any topics.

08 (2013-01-28)
This is the eighth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

3.4 Technical Specifications of The description about heat dissipation is added.


the Cabinet

5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS The description about the A over IP subrack configuration
5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS mode is deleted.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content Description

6 Boards The description on the number of the DPUa, DPUc,


DPUd, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a, FG2c, FG2d, GOUa,
GOUc, GOUd, NIUa, OIUa, OMUa/OMUb, PEUa,
POUc, XPUa, and XPUb boards that can be configured
is optimized.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc The description about the functions of the DPUc/DPUf
Board board is modified.
6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf
Board

Front Panel of the GBAM The function of the ports is modified.


(IBM X3650T)
Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM
X3650T)
Front Panel of the GBAM
(HUAWEI C5210)
Rear Panel of the GBAM
(HUAWEI C5210)
Front Panel of the GBAM (HP
CC3310)
Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP
CC3310)
6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/
OMUb Board
6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc
Board
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board
6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board

6.16.5 Technical Specifications The description of hard disk capacity is added.


of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Compared with issue 07 (2012-09-17), this issue does not exclude any following topics.

07 (2012-09-17)
This is the seventh commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 2


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content Description

5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack l The function description of the last bit of the DIP is
added.
l The description of setting the DIP is added.

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/ The function of COM port is modified.


OMUb Board
6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc
Board

6.11.5 Technical Specifications l The specifications of the optical ports on this board
of the GOUa Board are updated.
6.12.5 Technical Specifications l The receiver sensitivity names are unified.
of the GOUc Board l Saturation optical power is added.
6.13.5 Technical Specifications
of the GOUd Board
6.15.5 Technical Specifications
of the OIUa Board
6.21.5 Technical Specifications
of the POUc Board
6.23.5 Technical Specifications
of the SCUb Board

Compared with issue 06 (2012-06-25), this issue excludes the following topics:
l Fan Box (Configured with the PFCB Board)

06 (2012-06-25)
This is the sixth commercial release of V900R013C00.
Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not include any new topics.
Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/ The function of COM port is modified.


GCGa Board
6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board
6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/ The function of USB and COM port are modified.
OMUb Board
6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc
Board

6.16.5 Technical Specifications Hard disk capacity is modified to 73 GB or above x 2


of the OMUa/OMUb Board (RAID 1).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 3


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Compared with issue 05 (2012-01-05), this issue does not exclude any topics.

05 (2012-01-05)
This is the fifth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 6.9 FG2d Board


– 6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board
– 6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board
– 6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board
– 6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board
– 6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board
l 6.13 GOUd Board
– 6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board
– 6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board
– 6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board
– 6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board
– 6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue 04 (2011-08-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

04 (2011-08-31)
This is the fourth commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

3.4 Technical Specifications of The following specifications are added: power


the Cabinet consumption and heat dissipation.

6 Boards l The description of board replacement is added.


l The information about interfaces sharing an interface
board is added.
l Specifications about bandwidth provided by the
backplane for each board are added.

6.22.5 Technical Specifications Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slot


of the SCUa Board when the subrack is configured with two SCUa boards are
added.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 4


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content Description

6.23.5 Technical Specifications Specifications about switching bandwidth of each slot


of the SCUb Board when the subrack is configured with two SCUb boards
are added.

6.24.5 Technical Specifications The specification about board processing capability is


of the TNUa Board added.

6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 port
number is added.

6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board The description of optical port multiplexing E1/T1 port
number is added.

6.11.5 Technical Specifications The specification unit when the GOUa board functions as
of the GOUa Board an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.12.5 Technical Specifications The specification unit when the GOUc board functions as
of the GOUc Board an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.21.5 Technical Specifications The specification unit when the POUc board functions as
of the POUc Board an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.7.5 Technical Specifications The specification unit when the FG2a board functions as
of the FG2a Board an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.8.5 Technical Specifications The specification unit when the FG2c board functions as
of the FG2c Board an A interface is changed from CIC to Erlang.

6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board The board slot is modified.

Compared with issue 03 (2011-05-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

03 (2011-05-30)
This is the third commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

5.6 Technical Specifications of The specification of power consumption is modified.


the Subrack

Compared with issue 02 (2011-04-25), this issue does not exclude any topics.

02 (2011-04-25)
This is the second commercial release of V900R013C00.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 5


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue includes the following new topics:

l 7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue incorporates the following changes:

Content Description

6.23.5 Technical Specifications The specification of power consumption and weight are
of the SCUb Board modified.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications The specification of power consumption and weight are
of the DPUf Board modified.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications The specification of power consumption is modified.


of the DPUg Board

Compared with issue 01 (2011-03-30), this issue does not exclude any topics.

01 (2011-03-30)
This is the first commercial release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not include any new topics.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not incorporate any changes.

Compared with issue Draft A (2011-01-31), this issue does not exclude any topics.

Draft A (2011-01-31)
This is the Draft A release of V900R013C00.

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue includes the following new
topics:

l 6.4 DPUf Board


l 6.5 DPUg Board
l 6.17 OMUc Board
l 6.23 SCUb Board
l 7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue incorporates the following
changes:

Content Description

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High- The figure of the rear panel of the high-power power
Power Power Distribution Box distribution box is modified.

4.2.2 Rear Panel of the The figure of the rear panel of the common power
Common Power Distribution distribution box is modified.
Box

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 6


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 1 Changes in the BSC6900 GSM Hardware Description

Content Description

7.19 EMU RS485 The installation of EMU RS485 communication cable is


Communication Cable modified.

6.19.6 Technical Specifications The A-interface processing specification of the board is


of the PEUa Board added: CIC (64K).

Compared with issue 03 (2010-09-20) of V900R012C01, this issue does not exclude any topics.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 7


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

2 Physical Structure

The BSC6900 hardware consists of the cabinet, cables, and LMT.


Figure 2-1 shows the BSC6900 physical structure.

Figure 2-1 BSC6900 physical structure

(1) GPS: Global Positioning System (2) PDF: Power Distribution Frame (DC)

(3) LMT: Local Maintenance Terminal

Table 2-1 describes the components of the BSC6900.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 8


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 2 Physical Structure

Table 2-1 Components of the BSC6900


Component Description

Cabinet For details, see 3 Cabinet.

Cables For details, see 7 Cables.

GPS antenna system The GPS antenna system consists of the antenna, feeder, jumper,
and surge protector.
The GPS antenna system is used to receive GPS satellite signals. It
is optional.

LMT The LMT refers to the operation and maintenance (OM) terminal
that is installed with the Huawei Local Maintenance Terminal
software and is connected to the OM network of the BSC6900. The
LMT is used to operate and maintain the BSC6900.
For details, see the BSC6900 GSM LMT User Guide.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 9


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3 Cabinet

About This Chapter

The cabinet is the main component of the BSC6900 system. The BSC6900 uses the Huawei
N68E-22 cabinet.

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
3.2 Classification of Cabinets
Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).
3.3 Components of the Cabinet
When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.
3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet
The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.
3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet
This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 10


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

3.1 Appearance of the Cabinet


The N68E-22 cabinet is of two types, namely, the single-door cabinet and the double-door
cabinet.
Figure 3-1 shows the single-door cabinet. Figure 3-2 shows the double-door cabinet.

Figure 3-1 Single-door cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 11


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-2 Double-door cabinet

3.2 Classification of Cabinets


Based on functions, cabinets are classified into the main processing rack (MPR), extended
processing rack (EPR), and transcoder rack (TCR).

MPR
Only one MPR is configured in the BSC6900.

EPR
The number of EPRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume, but only one EPR can be
configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to configure the EPR.

TCR
The number of TCRs to be configured depends on the traffic volume and the configuration modes
of subracks. Up to two TCRs can be configured in the BSC6900. You can also choose not to
configure a TCR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 12


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

For details on the components of the MPR, the EPR, or the TCR, see 3.3 Components of the
Cabinet.

3.3 Components of the Cabinet


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, the components of the MPR are different from
those of the EPR/TCR. When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the components of
the MPR are the same as those of the EPR/TCR.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the OMU)/EPR/TCR


When the MPR cabinet is configured with the OMU board, the components of the MPR are the
same as those of the EPR/TCR. The components are the power distribution box, subrack, air
defence subrack, independent fan subrack, cable rack, rack, and rear cable trough. Figure 3-3
shows the components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 13


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-3 Components of the MPR (configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

(1) Air inlet (2) Independent fan subrack (3) Subrack

(4) Air defence subrack (5) Filler panel (6) Power distribution box

(7) Cable rack (8) Rear cable trough (9) Cable rack

Table 3-1 lists the components of the cabinet and describes their configurations.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 14


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-1 Components of the cabinet and their configurations


Component Configuration

4.1 High-Power Power One common power distribution box or one high-power
Distribution Box or 4.2 power distribution box is configured.
Common Power Distribution
Box

Subrack l The MPR is configured with one main processing


subrack (MPS). In addition, depending on the traffic
volume, it is configured with zero to two extended
processing subracks (EPSs) or transcoder subracks
(TCSs).
l The EPR is configured with one to three EPSs,
depending on the traffic volume.
l The TCR is configured with one to three TCSs,
depending on the traffic volume.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.

Independent Fan Subrack Only one independent fan subrack is configured.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

Cable Tray If a BSC6900 is configured with two cabinets and the


cabling distance between the two cabinets is longer than 10
m, a cable tray is configured for each cabinet. Optical fibers
go through the cable tray installed at the bottom of a cabinet.

NOTE
The subracks are numbered from bottom to top, and the MPS is numbered 0.

Components of the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


When the MPR is configured with the GBAM, its components are the power distribution box,
subrack, air defence subrack, KVM, LAN switch, cable tray, GBAM, and rear cable trough.
Figure 3-4 shows the components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 15


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-4 Components of the MPR (configured with the GBAM)

(1) GBAM (2) Filler panel (3) Cable tray (4) LAN switch (5) KVM
(6) Subrack (7) Air defence subrack (8) Power distribution box (9) Cable rack (10) Rear cable trough

Table 3-2 lists the components of the MPR and describes their configurations.

Table 3-2 Components of the MPR and their configurations


Component Configuration

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box Only one common power distribution box
is configured.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 16


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Component Configuration

Subrack The MPR is configured with one MPS. In


addition, depending on the traffic volume,
it is configured with zero to two EPSs or
TCSs.

Air Defence Subrack Two air defence subracks are configured.

KVM The KVM is optional. The MPR can be


configured with one KVM.

LAN switch One LAN switch is configured.

Cable Tray One is configured.

GBAM One GBAM is configured.

Rear Cable Trough Three rear cable troughs are configured.

NOTE

The MPR can use the common power distribution box but not the high-power distribution box when it is
configured with the GBAM.

3.4 Technical Specifications of the Cabinet


The technical specifications of the cabinet consist of cabinet dimensions, height of the available
space, cabinet weight, rated input voltage, input voltage range, Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC), power consumption, and heat dissipation.

Technical Specifications of the BSC6900 Cabinet (N68E-22)


The BSC6900 uses the Huawei N68E-22 cabinet.
Table 3-3 describes the technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22).

Table 3-3 Technical specifications of the BSC6900 cabinet (N68E-22)


Item Specification

Dimensions (H x W x D) 2200 mm x 600 mm x 800 mm

Height of the available space 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight l Empty cabinet ≤ 100 kg


l Cabinet in full configuration ≤ 320 kg

Rated input voltage -48 V DC power supply

Input voltage range -40 V to -57 V

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 17


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Item Specification

EMC l Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386


l Meets the requirements in Council directive 89/336/
EEC

Power consumption The cabinet power consumption equals the sum of power
consumption of all subracks in the cabinet.
It is recommended that the power distribution system
provide a maximum of 5100 W power per cabinet to
facilitate capacity expansion.

Heat consumption The heat generated by a cabinet equals the total heat
generated by all subracks in the cabinet.
To facilitate capacity expansion in future, the air
conditioning system installed onsite must be able to
dissipate a maximum of 4100 W heat from each cabinet.

Heat dissipation A fan and air defense frames are installed in a BSC cabinet.
Air flows in from the bottom of the cabinet and flows out
from the top of the cabinet, ensuring good heat dissipation.

WARNING
When the voltage of power supply is lower than the lower threshold of the input voltage scope,
multiple boards will become abnormal at the same time.
Therefore, check the power system if multiple boards are abnormal at the same time.

3.5 Cable Connections of the Cabinet


This section describes the connections of the power cables, PGND cables, and signal cables in
the cabinet.

3.5.1 Relationship Between Power Outputs and Cabinet


Components
This section describes the fixed relationship between the outputs of the PDF and the inputs of
power distribution box as well as between the outputs of power distribution box and the
components in the cabinet.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


For details on the working mechanism of the power system, see the Power Supply Principle.

Figure 3-5 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR that
is configured with a high-power power distribution box. Table 3-4 describes the relationship

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 18


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a high-power
power distribution box.

Figure 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power
power distribution box)

Table 3-4 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with high-power power
distribution box)
PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input
Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

63 A -48 V DC A1(-) A7 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on the


output 1 (-) independent fan subrack

A8 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2


(-)

63 A -48 V DC B1(-) B7 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on the


output 2 independent fan subrack

B8 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2

63 A RTN power A1(+) A7 RTN RTN power input 2 on the


output 1 (+) independent fan subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 19


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input


Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

A8 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 2

63 A RTN power B1(+) B7 RTN RTN power input 1 on the


output 2 (+) independent fan subrack

B8 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 2

100 A -48 V DC A3(-) A9 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1


output 1 (-)

A10 NEG -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0


(-)

100 A -48 V DC B3(-) B9 NEG(-) -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1


output 2
B10 NEG -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0
(-)

100 A RTN power A3(+) A9 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


output 1 (+) 1

A10 RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


(+) 0

100 A RTN power B3(+) B9 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


output 2 (+) 1

B10 RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


(+) 0

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Figure 3-6 shows the relationship between power outputs and the components in the MPR that
is configured with a common power distribution box. Table 3-5 describes the relationship
between power outputs and the components in the MPR that is configured with a common power
distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 20


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-6 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)

Table 3-5 Relationship between power outputs and cabinet components (with common power
distribution box)
PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input
Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

100 A -48 V DC -48V1 I -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 2


output 1
II -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 1

III -48V1 -48 V DC input 1 on subrack 0

100 A -48 V DC -48V2 I -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 2


output 2
II -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 1

III -48V2 -48 V DC input 2 on subrack 0

100 A RTN power RTN RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


output 1 2

RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


1

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 21


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

PDF Output Input of Power Output Subrack Input


Distribution Box of Power
Distribut
ion Box

RTN RTN power input 1 on subrack


0

100 A RTN power RTN RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


output 2 2

RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


1

RTN RTN power input 2 on subrack


0

3.5.2 Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the Cabinet


The power cables in the cabinet are used to connect the power distribution box to the subrack
and independent fan subrack, thereby ensuring a stable power supply to the subrack and
independent fan subrack. The PGND cables are used to connect the cabinet to the ground bar in
the equipment room, thereby protecting the cabinet from electrostatic discharge.

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
OMU Board)/EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the connections of power cables and PGND
cables in the MPR are the same as the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the
EPR/TCR. Figure 3-7 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR
(configured with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR that is configured with the high-power power
distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 22


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the cabinet (configured with the
high-power power distribution box)

Table 3-6 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 23


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-6 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the BSC6900 cabinet
SN Description

5, 6, 11, 12 Power cables for the bottom subrack

3, 4, 9, 10 Power cables for the middle subrack

1, 2, 7, 8 Power cables for the top subrack

13 PGND cable connecting the power distribution box and


the mounting bar

14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19 PGND cables connecting the subracks and the mounting
bar

24, 25, 26 Inter-cabinet PGND cables

27, 28, 29, 30 Power cables for the independent fan subrack

31 PGND cable connecting the independent fan subrack and


the mounting bar

50-57 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side panels

Connections of Power Cables and PGND Cables in the MPR (Configured with the
GBAM)
Figure 3-8 shows the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with GBAM IBM X3650T. Figure 3-9 shows the connections of power cables and
PGND cables in the MPR that is configured with GBAM HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 24


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)

Table 3-7 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with IBM X3650T.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 25


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-7 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with IBM
X3650T)
SN Description

1-8 Power cables for subracks

9, 10 Power cables for the LAN switch

11 Power cable for the KVM

12 Monitoring signal cable for the power


distribution box

11.1.1, 11.1.2, 11.2.1, 11.2.2 Power cables for the GBAM

13 PGND cable connecting the power


distribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks

18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars of


different cabinets

20 PGND cable for the KVM

21 PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side


panels

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 26


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-9 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)

Table 3-8 describes the connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR that is
configured with HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 27


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-8 Connections of power cables and PGND cables in the MPR (configured with
HUAWEI C5210 or HP CC3310)
SN Description

1-8 Power cables for subracks

11 Power cable for the KVM

12 Monitoring signal cable for the power


distribution box

11.1.1, 11.2.1 Power cables for the LAN switch

9.1, 9.2, 10.1, 10.2, 11.1.2, 11.2.2, 11.1.3, Power cables for the GBAM
11.2.3

13 PGND cable connecting the power


distribution box and the busbar

14, 15, 16, 17 PGND cables for subracks

18, 19 PGND cables connecting the busbars of


different cabinets

20 PGND cable for the KVM

21 PGND cable for the LAN switch

22, 23 PGND cables for the GBAM

24-31 PGND cables for cabinet doors and side


panels

3.5.3 Connections of Signal Cables for the MPR


The signal cables for the MPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-ohm twisted
pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, BITS
clock signal cable, Y-shaped clock signal cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.
For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-10 shows the
connections of signal cables for the MPR that is configured with one MPS subrack and two EPS
subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 28


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the MPR

NOTE

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actual
configurations depend on the site planning.
l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown in
Figure 3-10 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-9 describes the connections of signal cables for the MPR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 29


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Table 3-9 Connections of signal cables for the MPR


SN Description Connector Type Connector Type Remarks
1/Connection 2/Connection
Position 1 Position 2

1, 2, 3, 75-ohm coaxial SMB male Connector of the Figure 3-10


and 4 cable or 120-ohm connector/CLKIN1 BITS clock/BITS shows the
twisted pair cable port on the GCUa clock port clock cables
connecting the board in slot 13 of connected to
GCUa board to the the MPS the CLKIN1
BITS clock and CLKIN0
ports. In
75-ohm coaxial SMB male Connector of the practice, only
cable or 120-ohm connector/CLKIN0 BITS clock/BITS one port is
twisted pair cable port on the GCUa clock port connected to
connecting the board in slot 13 of the BITS
GCUa board to the the MPS clock source.
BITS clock

75-ohm coaxial SMB male Connector of the


cable or 120-ohm connector/CLKIN1 BITS clock/BITS
twisted pair cable port on the GCUa clock port
connecting the board in slot 12 of
GCUa board to the the MPS
BITS clock

75-ohm coaxial SMB male Connector of the


cable or 120-ohm connector/CLKIN0 BITS clock/BITS
twisted pair cable port on the GCUa clock port
connecting the board in slot 12 of
GCUa board to the the MPS
BITS clock

5 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT0 RJ45/CLKIN port -


signal cable port on the GCUa on the SCUb board
connecting the board in slot 12 or in slot 7 of the EPS
GCUa board to the 13 of the MPS
SCUb board

6 Y-shaped clock RJ45/CLKOUT0 RJ45/CLKIN port


signal cable port on the GCUa on the SCUb board
connecting the board in slot 12 or in slot 6 of the EPS
GCUa board to the 13 of the MPS
SCUb board

7 Cable connecting DB14/TDM port on DB14/TDM port -


TNUa boards in the TNUa board in on the TNUa board
different subracks slot 4 or 5 of the in slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS EPS

8 Cable connecting DB14/TDM port on DB14/TDM port


TNUa boards in the TNUa board in on the TNUa board
different subracks slot 4 or 5 of the in slot 4 or 5 of the
MPS EPS

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 30


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type Connector Type Remarks


1/Connection 2/Connection
Position 1 Position 2

9 and 10 E1/T1 cable for the DB44/E1/T1 port DDF or other NEs -
EIUa board on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the MPS

11 E1/T1 cable for the DB44/E1/T1 port DDF or other NEs -


EIUa board on the EIUa board
in slot 14 or 15 of
the EPS

12 Monitoring signal DB15/Port on the DB9/MONITOR 1 -


cable for the power rear panel of the port on the
distribution box power distribution independent fan
box subrack

13 Optical cable LC connector/Slot OIUa board in the -


between the MPS 27 of the MPS TCS, ODF, or other
and the TCS NEs

14 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on -


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 7 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
different subracks

15 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 7 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
different subracks

16 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 6 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
different subracks

17 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 6 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
different subracks

18 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 7 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
different subracks

19 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 6 of the MPS slot 6 of the EPS
different subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 31


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type Connector Type Remarks


1/Connection 2/Connection
Position 1 Position 2

20 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 7 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
different subracks

21 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on RJ45/10G port on


cable connecting the SCUb board in the SCUb board in
SCUb boards in slot 6 of the MPS slot 7 of the EPS
different subracks

22 Ethernet cable RJ45/Ethernet port RJ45/Ethernet port The Ethernet


between the OMUc on the OMUc board on the M2000 or of port on the
board and the the LAN OMUc board
M2000 or LAN is connected
to the
Ethernet port
on the M2000
or of the
LAN.

23 Monitoring signal DB15/MONITOR DB9/MONITOR One


cable for the 0 port on the port on the rear of monitoring
independent fan independent fan the subrack at the signal cable
subrack subrack bottom for the
independent
fan subrack is
mandatory
and is
installed
before
delivery.

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards
inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two
subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be
connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.4 Connections of Signal Cables for the EPR


The signal cables for the EPR are the 75-ohm coaxial cable, 120-ohm twisted pair cable, optical
cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa cable, Y-shaped clock signal
cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details about different types of signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-11 shows the
connections of signal cables for the EPR that is configured with three EPS subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 32


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-11 Connections of signal cables for the EPR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 33


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

NOTE

l The types and quantity of interface boards shown in Figure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actual
configurations depend on the site planning.
l The quantity and installation positions of Ethernet cables, optical cables, and trunk cables shown in
Figure 3-11 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.

Table 3-10 describes the connections of signal cables for the EPR.

Table 3-10 Connections of signal cables for the EPR


SN Description Connector Type 1/ Connector Type 2/
Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

1 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

2 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

3 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different subracks

4 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 34


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type 1/ Connector Type 2/


Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

5 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

6 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different subracks

7 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different subracks

8 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

9 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 35


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type 1/ Connector Type 2/


Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

10 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 6 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

11 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

12 l SFP+ high-speed RJ45/10G port on the SCUb RJ45/10G port on the


cable connecting board in slot 7 of the EPS SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards in MPS
different
subracks
l Multi-mode
optical cable
connecting
SCUb boards in
different
subracks

13, 14, E1/T1 cable for the DB44/E1/T1 port on the DDF or other NEs
and 15 EIUa board EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the EPS

16, 17, Cable connecting DB14/TDM port on the DB14/TDM port on the
and 18 TNUa boards in TNUa board in slot 4 or 5 of TNUa board in slot 4 or 5
different subracks the EPS of the EPS

19 Monitoring signal DB15/Port on the rear panel DB9/MONITOR 1 port on


cable for the power of the power distribution the independent fan
distribution box box subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 36


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type 1/ Connector Type 2/


Connection Position 1 Connection Position 2

20 Monitoring signal DB15/MONITOR 0 port on DB9/MONITOR port on


cable for the the independent fan subrack the rear of the subrack at
independent fan the bottom
subrack

NOTE

The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards
inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two
subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be
connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

3.5.5 Connections of Signal Cables for the TCR


The signal cables for the TCR are the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable, active/standby 120-
ohm twisted pair cable, optical cable, straight-through cable, SFP+ high-speed cable, inter-TNUa
cable, Y-shaped clock cable, and monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.
For details on signal cables, see 7 Cables. Figure 3-12 shows the connections of the signal cables
for the TCR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 37


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

Figure 3-12 Connections of signal cables for the TCR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 38


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

NOTE

l The types of interface boards, installation positions of cables, and number of cables shown in Figure
3-12 are taken as examples. The actual configurations depend on the site planning.
l Among the multiple TCSs configured in the BSC6900 cabinet, one TCS is responsible for forwarding
the OM signals from other TCSs, and this TCS is referred to as the main TCS. In Figure 3-12, the
lowest TCS serves as the main subrack. In practice, any TCS can serve as the main subrack, and the
SCUb board in the main TCS is connected to the SCUb boards in other TCSs in star topology.

Table 3-11 describes the connections of signal cables for the TCR.

Table 3-11 Explanation of connections of signal cables for the TCR

SN Description Connector Type1/ Connector Type2/


Connection Position1 Connection Position2

1 Monitoring signal DB15/Port connecting the DB9/MONITOR 1 port on


cable for the power power distribution box to the independent fan
distribution box the independent fan subrack subrack

2 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 6 of the SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

3 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 6 of the SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

4 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 6 of the SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

5 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 6 of the SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

6 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 7 of the SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

7 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 7 of the SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

8 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 7 of the SCUb board in slot 6 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 39


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 3 Cabinet

SN Description Connector Type1/ Connector Type2/


Connection Position1 Connection Position2

9 SFP+ high-speed RJ45/The 10G port on the RJ45/The 10G port on the
cable connecting SCUb board in slot 7 of the SCUb board in slot 7 of the
SCUb boards of main TCS TCS
different subracks

10, 11, Cable connecting DB14/TDM ports on the DB14/TDM ports on the
12 TNUa boards of TNUa boards in slots 4 and TNUa boards in slots 4 and
different subracks 5 of the TCS 5 of the TCS

13, 14, E1/T1 cable for the DB44/E1/T1 port on the DDF or other NEs
15 EIUa board EIUa board in slot 14 or 15
of the TCS

16 Optical cable LC optical port/The RX/TX OIUa board of the MPS/


between different port on the OIUa board in EPS or ODF
subracks slot 27 of the TCS

17 Monitoring signal DB15/MONITOR 0 port on DB9/Monitor port on the


cable for the the independent fan subrack rear of the bottom subrack
independent fan
subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 40


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4 Components of the Cabinet

About This Chapter

Components of the cabinet involve the power distribution box (common power distribution box
or high-power power distribution box), air defence subrack, rear cable trough, subrack,
independent fan subrack, rack, GBAM, KVM, LAN switch, and cable tray.

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.2 Common Power Distribution Box
A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.
4.3 Air Defence Subrack
The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.
4.4 Rear Cable Trough
The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
4.5 Cable Tray
The cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.
4.7 LAN Switch
The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.
4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The GBAM is installed in the MPR.
4.9 Independent Fan Subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 41


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 42


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.1 High-Power Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.

The high-power power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the four -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has four -48 V outputs and four RTN outputs. The high-power power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.

4.1.1 Front Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box are the panel of
the Power Allocation Monitoring Unit (PAMU) and the power switches.

Figure 4-1 shows the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Figure 4-1 Front panel of the high-power power distribution box

(1) Panel of the PAMU board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED
(4) Mute switch (5) Power switches (6) Labels for power switches

NOTE

l For details about the PAMU board, see 6.18 PAMU Board.
l When the power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the PAMU board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the
RUN and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the
power distribution box.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.

l If you set the mute switch to I, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when
it is faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to O, the power distribution box does not generate any audible
alarm when it is faulty.

The front panel of the high-power power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 43


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-1 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Table 4-1 LEDs on the front panel of the high-power power distribution box

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is not working or it


for 0.25s does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the PAMU


board or the power distribution box
does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the power


distribution box.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

4.1.2 Rear Panel of the High-Power Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, port used to connect the power distribution box to
a subrack, and a 2-hole ground screw.

Figure 4-2 shows the rear panel of the high-power power distribution box.

Figure 4-2 Rear panel of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal (3) Port used to connect the power
block distribution box to a subrack

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 44


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

(4) 2-hole ground screw (5) J1 port (6) J2 port (port used to connect the power
distribution box to a EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-2 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l On the power input terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
are labeled 3(-) and 1(-) respectively, and the wiring terminals for the RTN power cable are labeled 3
(+) and 1(+) respectively.
l On the power output terminal blocks of groups A and B, the wiring terminals for the -48 V power cable
and RTN power cable are labeled NEG(-) and RTN(+), respectively.

4.1.3 Technical Specifications of the High-Power Power


Distribution Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
high-power power distribution box.
Table 4-2 describes the technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box.

Table 4-2 Technical specifications of the high-power power distribution box (WP1E01DPD)
Item Specification

Power consumption 30 W

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC

Input mode Two groups of power inputs: A and B. Group A


consists of the power inputs A1+A2 and A3. Group
B consists of the power inputs B1+B2 and B3. Each
group has one or two -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
inputs.

Max. input current The maximum rated input current of each route is
100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC

Output voltage -40 V DC to -72 V DC


range

Output mode and Two groups of power outputs: A and B. Each group
current has one to four -48 V DC or -60 V DC power
outputs. The maximum rated output current of each
output is 50 A and that of each group is 100 A.
Each output is controlled by MCBs: A7 to A10 and
B7 to B10. These MCBs provide the power surge
protection function.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 45


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Item Specification

Output protection The power surge protection point is 70 A. You need


specifications to manually switch on the corresponding MCB
after the power surge protection.

Rated output power 9,600 W (Two groups of power outputs: A and B.


Each group has two -48 V DC power outputs.)
NOTE
For group A, power inputs A1+A2 correspond to power outputs A1 to A8, and power input A3 corresponds
to power outputs A9 and A10. Similarly, for group B, power inputs B1+B2 correspond to power outputs
B1 to B8, and power input B3 corresponds to power outputs B9 and B10.

4.1.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the High-Power Power


Distribution Box
The high-power power distribution box of the cabinet has 20 (10 x 2) power outputs. There is a
fixed relationship between the eight outputs of the power distribution box and the components
of the cabinet.
Figure 4-3 shows the relationship between the eight power switches on the power distribution
box and the components in the MPR. Table 4-3 describes the relationship between the eight
power switches on the power distribution box and the components in the MPR.

Figure 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 46


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-3 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR

Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 A8, B8

Subrack 1 A9, B9

Subrack 0 A10, B10

Independent fan subrack A7, B7

4.2 Common Power Distribution Box


A high-power power distribution box or common power distribution box is installed inside each
cabinet at the top.

The common power distribution box provides lightning protection and power surge protection
for the two -48 V inputs and supplies two groups of power to the components in the cabinet.
Each group has three -48 V outputs and three RTN outputs. The common power distribution
box also detects the status of input voltage and the output power, and generates audible and
visual alarms when faults occur.

4.2.1 Front Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the front panel of the common power distribution box are the panel of the
Distribution Monitor and Communication board (MDMC), labels for power switches, power
switches, and the panel of the Overvoltage Protection Board (WOPB).

Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the common power distribution box.

Figure 4-4 Front panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Panel of the MDMC board (2) RUN LED (3) ALM LED (4) Mute switch
(5) Labels for power switches (6) Power switches (7) Panel of the WOPB board

NOTE

For details about the MDMC and WOPB boards, see 6.14 MDMC Board and 6.27 WOPB Board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 47


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

CAUTION
l Before operating a power switch, refer to the label for the power switch on the panel of the
common power distribution box.
l Before removing a component from the cabinet, one must turn off the power switch that
controls power supply to the component and remove the power cable for the component.

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the common power distribution box generates an audible
alarm when it is faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the common power distribution box does not generate
an audible alarm when it is faulty.
The front panel of the common power distribution box has two LEDs: RUN and ALM.
Table 4-4 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box.

Table 4-4 LEDs on the front panel of the common power distribution box
LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The MDMC board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The MDMC is not working or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

OFF There is no power supply to the MDMC


board or the common power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm related to the common


power distribution box.

ON The common power distribution box is


faulty. During the self-check of the
MDMC board, however, the ALM LED
is also on. This indicates that the ALM
LED is functional.

NOTE

When the common power distribution box is reset, the RUN and ALM LEDs turn on at the same time,
indicating that the MDMC board is performing self-check. As soon as the self-check is complete, the RUN
and ALM LEDs turn off. Then, the RUN and ALM LEDs display the operating status of the common power
distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 48


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.2.2 Rear Panel of the Common Power Distribution Box


The components on the rear panel of the common power distribution box are the power input
terminal block, power output terminal block, and port used to connect the power distribution
box to a subrack.
Figure 4-5 shows the rear panel of the common power distribution box.

Figure 4-5 Rear panel of the common power distribution box

(1) Power input terminal block (2) Power output terminal block (3) Port used to connect the power
distribution box to a subrack
(4) COM1 port (port used to connect (5) COM2 port
the power distribution box to an EMU)

NOTE

l Figure 4-5 shows only the main BSC6900-related ports on the power distribution box.
l The port on the power distribution box is connected to the bottom subrack through the monitoring
signal cable for the power distribution box.

On the power input terminal block and power output terminal block, the wiring terminals for
the -48 V power cable and RTN power cable are labeled -48 V and RTN, respectively.

4.2.3 Technical Specifications of the Common Power Distribution


Box
This section describes the technical specifications of the input and output power supplies of the
common power distribution box.
Table 4-5 describes the technical specifications of the common power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 49


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-5 Technical specifications of the common power distribution box


Item Specification

Power consumption 30 W

Input Rated input voltage -48 V DC

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Input mode Two -48 V DC inputs

Max. input current Two power inputs. The


maximum current of each
input is 100 A.

Output Rated output voltage -48 V DC

Output voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Output mode and current Six groups of independent


power outputs. Each group
has one -48 V DC power
output and one RTN power
output. Each output can be
switched on or off, and is
provided with the power
surge protection function.
When the total current of the
six outputs is smaller than
100 A, the maximum current
of each output is 70 A.

Output protection The power surge protection


specifications point is 87.5 A. You need to
manually switch on the
corresponding MCB after
the power surge protection.

Rated output power Hot backup mode: 4,800 W

4.2.4 Distribution of Power Switches on the Common Power


Distribution Box
There is a fixed relationship between the six outputs of the common power distribution box and
the components in the cabinet.

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the OMU Board)/
EPR/TCR
When the MPR is configured with the OMU board, the distribution of power switches on the
common power distribution box in the MPR is the same as the distribution of power switches
on the common power distribution box in the EPR/TCR. Figure 4-6 shows the relationship
between the six power switches on the common power distribution box and the components in

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 50


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

the cabinet. Table 4-6 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the common
power distribution box and the components in the cabinet.

Figure 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured
with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR

Table 4-6 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured
with the OMU board)/EPR/TCR
Component Power Switch

Subrack 2 SW1, SW4

Subrack 1 SW2, SW5

Subrack 0 SW3, SW6

Distribution of Power Switches in the MPR (Configured with the GBAM)


Figure 4-7 shows the relationship between the six power switches on the common power
distribution box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM. Table
4-7 describes the relationship between the six power switches on the common power distribution
box and the components in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 51


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured
with the GBAM)

Table 4-7 Relationship between the power switches and components in the MPR (configured
with the GBAM)

Component Power Switch

Subrack 1 SW1, SW4

Subrack 0 SW2, SW5

KVM SW3

LAN switch SW3

GBAM SW3, SW6

4.3 Air Defence Subrack


The air defence subrack is installed between two subracks. It is used to form a straight-through
air channel. The air defence subrack is 1 U in height.

Physical appearance
Figure 4-8 shows the air defence subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 52


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-8 Air defence subrack

Dimensions
The dimensions of the air defence subrack are 44.45 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 476.1 mm
(depth).

4.4 Rear Cable Trough


The rear cable trough is used for routing and binding of the cables of rear boards. Each rear cable
trough has three fiber management trays installed at the bottom to coil the optical cables.
Figure 4-9 shows the rear cable trough.

Figure 4-9 Rear cable trough

4.5 Cable Tray


The cable tray provides space for the routing of the Ethernet cables for the LAN switch.
Figure 4-10 shows the cable tray.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 53


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-10 cable tray

4.6 KVM
KVM is an abbreviation for Keyboard, Video, and Mouse. It is the operation platform of the
GBAM. The KVM is optional. It is installed in the MPR that is configured with the GBAM.

Appearance
Figure 4-11 shows the KVM.

Figure 4-11 KVM

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 54


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Front Panel
Figure 4-12 shows the front panel of the KVM.

Figure 4-12 Front panel of the KVM

(1) Handles (2) Switch on the KVM

Back Panel
Figure 4-13 shows the back panel of the KVM.

Figure 4-13 Back panel of the KVM

(1) Ground bolt (2) DC input power socket


(3) Power switch (4) Ports used to connect to the keyboard, video, and mouse

NOTE

To insert the KVM into the cabinet, press the white buttons on both sides of the KVM and slide the buttons
with index fingers, and at the same time insert the KVM into the cabinet. Then, release the buttons.

4.7 LAN Switch


The LAN switch is configured in the MPR.

The LAN switch has 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports. The LAN
switch connects the LMT PC to the BSC6900 and then connects the BSC6900 to the M2000.

Physical Appearance of the LAN Switch


The BSC6900 uses the Quidway S3026C LAN switches.

Figure 4-14 shows the LAN switch.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 55


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-14 LAN switch

Front Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the front panel of the LAN switch are mode switch button, configuration
port, LEDs, and Ethernet ports.

Figure 4-15 shows the front panel of the LAN switch.

Figure 4-15 Front panel of the LAN switch

(1) POWER LED (2) Mode status LED (A/L LED)


(3) Mode status LED (D/S LED) (4) Mode switch button (MODE button)
(5) 10M/100M adaptive full-duplex BASE-TX Ethernet ports (6) Configuration port (CONSOLE port)

NOTE

l The CONSOLE port is used to configure the LAN switch to meet the requirements of the
BSC6900.
l The MODE button is used to enable the LEDs for the 10M/100M Ethernet ports to display different
types of states.

LEDs on the Front Panel of LAN Switch


There are three LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch: POWER LED, A/L LED, and D/S
LED.

Table 4-8 describes the LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 56


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-8 LEDs on the front panel of the LAN switch


LED Color Status Description

ON The LAN switch is powered on.


POWER Green
OFF The LAN switch is powered off.

The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is traffic over


ON (blink)
Yellow the port.
(left) OFF The port is in ACTIVE mode, and there is no traffic
over the port.
A/L The port is in LINK OK mode (indicating correct
ON
connection).
Green
(right) OFF The port is in LINK FAULT mode (indicating no
connection) or in LINK ERROR mode (indicating
incorrect connection).

Yellow ON The port is in FULL DUPLEX mode.


(left) OFF The port is in HALF DUPLEX mode.
D/S
Green ON The rate of the Ethernet port is 100 Mbit/s.
(right) OFF The rate of the Ethernet port is 10 Mbit/s.

NOTE

Only ports 2, 4, 20, 22, 24 on the LAN switch are used.

Rear Panel of the LAN Switch


The components on the rear panel of the LAN switch are DC power socket and grounding post
for the PGND cable.
Figure 4-16 shows the rear panel of the LAN switch.

Figure 4-16 Rear panel of the LAN switch

(1) DC power socket (2) Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8 GBAM
The BSC6900 uses three models of GBAM: IBM X3650T, HUAWEI C5210, and HP CC3310.
The GBAM is installed in the MPR.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 57


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

4.8.1 Functions of GBAM


The GBAM works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance Terminal
(LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The GBAM performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,


security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Provides the LMT or M2000 users with the operation and maintenance port of the
BSC6900 system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa
board of the BSC6900

4.8.2 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-17 shows the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-17 GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Front Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
a CD-ROM drive.

Figure 4-18 shows the front panel of the GBAM server (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-18 Front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

Table 4-9 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 58


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-9 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)
No. Silkscreen Label Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm


indication. When this LED is on (yellow), a critical
fault has occurred on the system and the system
cannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication.


When this LED is on (yellow), a major fault has
occurred on the system. When this occurs, the
system can still work properly; however,
performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm


indication. When the LED is on (yellow), a minor
fault has occurred on the system. When this occurs,
the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm


indication. When this LED is on (yellow), the
power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port


does not require a signal cable or connection to
other devices when the system runs properly.
Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cable


or connection to other devices when the system
runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not
affected.

10 0 Hard disk 0 activity LED. When this LED is on


(green), it indicates that the data on hard disk 0 can
be normally read or written to. When this LED is
on (yellow), it indicates that hard disk 0 is faulty.

11 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on


(green), the data on hard disk 1 can be normally
read or written to. When this LED is on (yellow),
hard disk 1 is faulty.

12 ON Main power LED

13 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

14 System ID LED

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 59


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

No. Silkscreen Label Description

15 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

16 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the


system to perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.

Figure 4-19 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Figure 4-19 Rear panel of the GBAM

Table 4-10 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T).

Table 4-10 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (IBM X3650T)

No. Silkscreen Description


Label

1 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

2 None PCI card bracket (with no card inserted)

3 None PCI card bracket (with a card inserted)

4 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

5 None Power module

6 PS/2 mouse/keyboard ports. The upper port is for the


mouse, and the lower one is for the keyboard.

7 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does


not require a signal cable or connection to other devices
when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 60


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

No. Silkscreen Description


Label

8 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

9 2 RJ45 NIC port 2

10 Port for the video

11 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

12 0 USB port 0.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

13 Server management port

14 Ultra320 SCSI port

15 Grounding post for the PGND cable

4.8.3 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).
Figure 4-20 shows the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Figure 4-20 GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (C5210) are LEDs, ports, switches, and a CD-
ROM drive.
Figure 4-21 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 61


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-21 Front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-11 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Table 4-11 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Silkscreen
No. Label Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the
LED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system,
and the system cannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system.
When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however,
performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system.
When this occurs, the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not


require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the
system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not
affected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connection


to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,
10 equipment security is not affected.

11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or
written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 62


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Silkscreen
No. Label Description

12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), it


indicates that the data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or
written to. When this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty.

13 ON Main power LED

14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15 System ID LED

16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system to
perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210) are power port, grounding
post, and other ports.

Figure 4-22 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Figure 4-22 Rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

Table 4-12 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210).

Table 4-12 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HUAWEI C5210)

No. Silkscreen Description


Label

1 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs properly.
Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

2 Port for the video

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 63


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

No. Silkscreen Description


Label

3 Ultra320 SCSI port

4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a Y-


shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to the
GBAM (C5210).

6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not


require a signal cable or connection to other devices when
the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is
not affected.

7 2 USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs properly.
Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

9 Grounding post for the PGND cable

10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48 V
power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN cable.)

11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0

4.8.4 Physical Appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


This section describes the physical appearance of the GBAM (HP CC3310).
Figure 4-23 shows the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-23 GBAM (HP CC3310)

Front Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are LEDs, ports, switches, and
a CD-ROM drive.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 64


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Figure 4-24 shows the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-24 Front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-13 describes the silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Table 4-13 Silkscreen labels on the front panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
Silkscreen
No. Label Description

1 None CD-ROM drive

2 Power switch

3 Reset switch

4 CRT The CRT (Critical) LED is used for alarm indication. When the
LED is on (yellow), a critical fault has occurred on the system
and the system cannot work properly.

5 MJR The MJR (Major) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), a major fault has occurred on the system.
When this occurs, the system can still work properly; however,
performance deteriorates significantly.

6 MNR The MNR (Minor) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), a minor fault has occurred on the system.
When this occurs, the system can still work properly.

7 PWR The PWR (Power) LED is used for alarm indication. When this
LED is on (yellow), the power supply for the system is faulty.

8 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does not


require a signal cable or connection to other devices when the
system runs properly. Therefore, equipment security is not
affected.

9 USB port.The port does not require a signal cable or connection


to other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,
10 equipment security is not affected.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 65


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Silkscreen
No. Label Description

11 2 Hard disk 2 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), the


data on hard disk 2 can be normally read or written to. When
this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 2 is faulty.

12 1 Hard disk 1 activity LED. When this LED is on (green), the


data on hard disk 1 can be normally read or written to. When
this LED is on (yellow), hard disk 1 is faulty.

13 ON Main power LED

14 NIC0/NIC1 activity LED

15 System ID LED

16 ID switch, used to switch system IDs

17 None NMI switch. The NMI switch is used to stop the system to
perform fault diagnosis.

Rear Panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)


The components on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310) are power port, grounding post,
and other ports.
Figure 4-25 shows the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Figure 4-25 Rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)

Table 4-14 describes the silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 66


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-14 Silkscreen labels on the rear panel of the GBAM (HP CC3310)
No. Silkscreen Label Description

1 1 USB port 1.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

2 Port for the video

3 Ultra320 SCSI port

4 1 RJ45 NIC port 1

5 Integrated port for mouse and keyboard. You can use a


Y-shaped cable to connect the mouse and keyboard to
the GBAM (HP CC3310).

6 Serial port for an 8-pin RJ45 connector.The port does


not require a signal cable or connection to other devices
when the system runs properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.

7 2 USB port 2.The port does not require a signal cable or


connection to other devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment security is not affected.

8 None 10M/100M adaptive port for Ethernet adapter

9 Grounding post for the PGND cable

10 None DC input power socket (wiring terminal "-" is for the -48
V power cable, and wiring terminal "+" is for the RTN
cable.)

11 Alarms DB15 port (for exporting alarm information from the


GBAM)

12 0 RJ45 NIC port 0

4.9 Independent Fan Subrack


Besides the fan boxes configured in subracks, the N68E-22 cabinet also has an independent fan
subrack configured at the bottom of the cabinet to improve the reliability of heat dissipation.

4.9.1 Appearance of the Independent Fan Subrack


The independent fan subrack is composed of the front panel, fan box, and the rear panel.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 67


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Front View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-26 Front view of the independent fan subrack

(1) PFCU board (2) Fans (3) Handle of the independent fan subrack
(4) Screw (5) LED on the fan box

NOTE

The PFCU is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCU Board.

Rear View of the Independent Fan Subrack

Figure 4-27 Rear view of the independent fan subrack

(1) Monitor 1 Port, used to connect to the power (2) Power input port (3) Monitor 2 Port (Reserved)
distribution box
(4) Monitor 0 Port, used to connect to subracks (5) Monitor 3 Port (Reserved)

4.9.2 Technical Specifications of the Independent Fan Subrack


The technical specifications of the independent fan subrack refer to the dimensions, weight,
power supply, maximum power consumption, fan speed, and Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).

Table 4-15 describes the technical specifications of the independent fan subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 68


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 4 Components of the Cabinet

Table 4-15 Technical specifications of the independent fan subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 86.1 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Weight Empty subrack: ≤ 2.4 kg; subrack with fan boxes: ≤ 6.9
kg

Power supply -48 V DC. The input voltage ranges from -40 V DC to -60
V DC.

Maximum power consumption ≤ 150 W

Fan speed < 5.0 m/s

EMC Meets the requirements in ETSI EN300 386 V1.2.1


(2000-03).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 69


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5 Subracks

About This Chapter

This chapter describes subracks. Subracks are used to house boards and backplanes to form an
independent unit.

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).
5.2 Components of the Subrack
The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.
5.3 Slots in the Subrack
The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the
bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough
bandwidth.
5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack
The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
5.5 Configuration of the Subrack
The BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, and
TCS in different subrack configuration modes.
5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack
The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 70


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5.1 Classification of Subracks


Based on functions, subracks are classified into the main processing subrack (MPS), extended
processing subrack (EPS), and transcoder subrack (TCS).

MPS
As the main processing subrack, the MPS is configured in the MPR. Only one MPS is configured
in the BSC6900. The MPS processes the basic services of the BSC6900, performs operation and
maintenance, and provides clock signals for the system.

EPS
As the extended processing subrack, the EPS is configured in the MPR or EPR. It processes the
basic services of the BSC6900.

TCS
As the transcoder subrack, the TCS is configured in the MPR, EPR, or TCR in BM/TC separated
configuration mode. It performs transcoding, rate adaptation, and sub-multiplexing.

5.2 Components of the Subrack


The main components of the subrack are the fan box, slots, front cable trough, and backplane.

Structure of the Subrack


In compliance with the IEC60297 standard, each subrack is 19 inches in width and 12 U in
height. Figure 5-1 shows the construction of the subrack with the front and rear views of the
component layouts of the subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 71


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-1 Construction of the subrack

(1) Fan box (2) Mounting ear (3) Guide rail


(4) Front cable trough (5) Boards (6) Ground screw

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 72


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

(7) DC power input port (8) Port for the monitoring signal cable of the (9) Cover plate of the DIP switch
power distribution box

Components
Table 5-1 describes the components of the subrack.

Table 5-1 Components of the subrack


Component Refer to...

Fan box 5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU


Board)

Slots in the subrack 5.3 Slots in the Subrack

Front cable trough The front cable trough is used to lead the cables
from the front of the subrack to both sides of the
cabinet.

Backplane The backplane is used to connect the boards in


the same subrack.

5.2.1 Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box is used for heat dissipation in the cabinet. Each subrack is configured with one fan
box. This section shows the appearance of the fan box and location of the LEDs on the fan box
when the fan box is configured with the PFCU board. This also describes the technical
specifications of the fan box.

Appearance of Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The fan box consists of the fans, board, LED, and handles.
Figure 5-2 shows the fan box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 73


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-2 Fan box (configured with the PFCU board)

(1) Power unit of the fan box (2) Fans (3) PFCU board
(4) LED on the fan box (5) Screws (6) Handles of the fan box

NOTE

l The power unit is inserted into the rear part of the fan box. It provides power supply for nine fans and
keeps the voltage stable through a stabilizing tube, to ensure normal operation of the fans.
l The PFCU board is the control unit of the fan box. For details on the PFCU board, see 6.20 PFCU
Board.

LED on the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)


The LED on the fan box blinks red or green, indicating different working status of the fan box.
Table 5-2 describes the different meanings that the LED indicates.

Table 5-2 LED on the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Color Status Description

Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box works normally (the
fan box is registered).

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box works normally (the
fan box is not registered).

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 74


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Color Status Description

Red ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The fan box is registered and has
one of the following problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Communication failure
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at too low a speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

ON for 0.25s and OFF for 0.25s The fan box is not registered and
has one of the following
problems:
l One-way power supply to
the subrack
l Fans ceasing to run or
running at a too low speed
l Fan box in an excessively
high temperature or
temperature sensor failure

NOTE

When the fan box is registered, the communication between the fan box and the SCUa/SCUb board in the
same subrack is established. When the fan box is not registered, the communication between the fan box
and the SCUa/SCUb board in the same subrack is not established.

Technical Specifications of the Fan Box (Configured with the PFCU Board)
The technical specifications of the fan box refer to the space height, voltage, maximum power,
detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed adjustment.
Table 5-3 lists the technical specifications of the fan box.

Table 5-3 Technical specifications of the fan box (configured with the PFCU board)
Item Specification

Space height 1.5 U (1 U = 44.45 mm)

Input voltage range -42 V DC to -60 V DC

Maximum power 150 W

Detectable temperature range -5°C to 55°C

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from
55% to 100% of the full speed.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 75


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

NOTE

When the BSC6900 is powered on, when a subrack is reset, or when the BSC6900 is upgraded, the fans
in the subrack run at full speed for a short period. This is the normal condition during system startup.

5.3 Slots in the Subrack


The backplane is positioned in the center of the subrack, and the boards are installed on the front
and rear sides of the backplane. Each slot provides a different switching bandwidth. Check the
bandwidth of the slot before installing a board. A board must be installed in a slot with enough
bandwidth.

Structure of the Subrack


Figure 5-3 shows the structure of the subrack.

Figure 5-3 Structure of the subrack

(1) Front slot (2) Backplane (3) Rear slot

NOTE

l Each subrack provides a total of 28 slots. The 14 slots on the front side of the backplane are numbered
from 00 to 13, and those on the rear side from 14 to 27.
l Two neighboring slots, such as slot 00 and slot 01 or slot 02 and slot 03, can be configured as a pair
of active/standby slots. A pair of active and standby boards must be installed in a pair of active and
standby slots. For example, if slot 00 is configured with the XPUa board, then slot 01 must be configured
with the XPUa board and slot 01 cannot be configured with the XPUb board.
l Different types of boards can be installed in all slots other than active/standby slots. For example, if
slot 00 and slot 01 are configured with XPUa boards, slot 02 and slot 03 can be configured with
XPUb boards.
l If the boards are in resource pool mode, then they can be installed in active/standby slots. For example,
if slot 08 is configured with the DPUc board, slot 09 can be configured with the DPUf board.

5.4 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 76


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 5-4 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 5-4 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 5-4 describes the bits.

Table 5-4 Description about the bits


Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 77


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Bit Description

8 (the most significant Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.
bit) NOTE
l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep
the former settings.
l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to
OFF.

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-
on is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Set bit 8 to OFF.
4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 5-5 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 5-5 Setting of the DIP switch

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 78


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OF ON ON OFF ON OFF
F

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OF ON ON ON ON OFF
F

5.5 Configuration of the Subrack


The BSC6900 subrack configuration includes the typical configuration of the MPS, EPS, and
TCS in different subrack configuration modes.

Principles for installing boards are as follows:

l The SCUa and SCUb boards must be installed in slots 6 and 7.


l The GCUa and GCUb boards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.
l The TNUa board must be installed in slot 4 or 5.
l The OMUa and OMUb boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to
27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. For existing BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUb
boards can be installed in slots 20 to 23. For new BSC6900s, the OMUa and OMUb
boards can be installed in slots 24 to 27.
l The OMUc board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS
at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 and 25 are recommended.
l The XPUa/XPUb/DPUa/DPUc/DPUd/DPUf/DPUg board is preferentially installed in the
front slots of a subrack. These boards are installed in the rear slots of the subrack only when
the slots in the front are occupied.
l Interface boards must be installed in the rear slots of a subrack to facilitate cable routing.
l Interface boards FG2c, GOUc, and UOIc are preferentially installed in slots 16 to 23,
because these boards have a high processing capability. These boards can be installed in
slots 14, 15, and 24 to 27 when slots 16 to 23 are occupied.

5.5.1 Configuration of the MPS


The boards installed in the MPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by the
BSC6900.

The boards that can be installed in the MPS are the OMUc, SCUb, GCUa, GCGa, TNUa, XPUa/
XPUb, DPUf, DPUg, EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 79


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

The following figures show the configurations of the MPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined modes.

Figure 5-5 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-6 Configuration of the MPS in BM/TC combined mode

NOTE

l The INT1 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/
GOUc/GOUd.
l The INT2 board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, or POUc.
l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPS
or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). For
details on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User
Guide of Nastar documents.
l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should
be performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration
Principles.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 80


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

5.5.2 Configuration of the EPS


The boards installed in the EPS depend on the subrack configuration mode used by the
BSC6900.
The boards that can be installed in the EPS are the SCUb, TNUa, XPUa/XPUb, DPUf, DPUg,
EIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, GOUa/GOUc/GOUd, POUc, OIUa, and PEUa.
The following figures show the configurations of the EPS in BM/TC separated, BM/TC
combined modes.

Figure 5-7 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC separated mode

Figure 5-8 Configuration of the EPS in BM/TC combined mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 81


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

NOTE

l The INT board (interface board) can be the PEUa, EIUa, OIUa, FG2a/FG2c/FG2d, POUc, or GOUa/
GOUc/GOUd.
l If customers have also purchased the Huawei Nastar product, they need to install an SAU board in the MPS
or EPS of the BSC6900 cabinet (the SAU board occupies two slots that work in active/standby mode). For
details on how to install software on the SAU board and how to maintain the SAU board, see the SAU User
Guide of Nastar documents.
l The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should
be performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration
Principles.

5.5.3 Configuration of the TCS


In BM/TC separated mode, the TCS can be configured in the TCR.
By default, the TCS must be configured with the SCUb and TNUa boards. The DPUf/DPUg
board and EIUa/OIUa board are optional boards.
Figure 5-9 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode.

Figure 5-9 Configuration of the TCS in A over E1/T1 mode

Figure 5-10 shows the configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 82


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 5 Subracks

Figure 5-10 Configuration of the TCS in A over STM-1 mode

NOTE

The preceding figures are for your reference only and cannot be used for site planning. Site planning should be
performed based on the actual conditions and on the instructions in the BSC6900 Configuration Principles.

5.6 Technical Specifications of the Subrack


The technical specifications of the subrack refer to the dimensions of the subrack, available space
height, weight, and power consumption in full configuration.
Table 5-6 describes the technical specifications of the subrack.

Table 5-6 Technical specifications of the subrack


Item Specification

Dimensions 530.6 mm (height) x 436 mm (width) x 480 mm (depth)

Available space height 12 U (1 U = 44.45 mm = 1.75 inches)

Weight Empty subrack: 25 kg; subrack configured with boards:


≤ 57 kg

Power consumption in full l MPS: ≤ 1,400 W


configuration l EPS: ≤ 1,400 W
l TCS: ≤ 1,000 W

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 83


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6 Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the boards supported by the BSC6900.

NOTE

If a board is configured in independent mode, its slot can switch a maximum of 4096 timeslots. If boards are
configured in active/standby mode, their slots can switch a maximum of 7168 timeslots.

The BSC6900 boards perform different functions through the loading of different software.
Table 6-1 describes the BSC6900 boards.

Table 6-1 Classification of BSC6900 boards

Boar Logical Function Interface Shared by Backplane Backplane


ds Supported Bandwidth of Bandwidth of
the Board When the Board When
the SCUa Board the SCUb Board
Is Installed in Is Installed in
the Same the Same
Subrack Subrack

DPUa GTC (GSM speech - - 2 GE 2 GE


service processing)

DPUc GTC (GSM speech - - 2 GE 2 GE


service processing)

DPUd GPCU (GSM - - 2 GE 2 GE


packet service
processing)

DPUf GTC (GSM speech - - 4 GE 4 GE


service processing)

DPUg GPCU (GSM - - 4 GE 4 GE


packet service
processing)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 84


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Boar Logical Function Interface Shared by Backplane Backplane


ds Supported Bandwidth of Bandwidth of
the Board When the Board When
the SCUa Board the SCUb Board
Is Installed in Is Installed in
the Same the Same
Subrack Subrack

EIUa Abis_TDM A, Abis, Ater, and Cannot be shared 2 GE 2 GE


Pb by multiple
Ater_TDM interfaces
Pb_TDM

A_TDM

FG2a GbIP (GSM BSC A, Abis, and Gb Abis and A 2 GE 2 GE


Gb IP interface)

IP

FG2c IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

FG2d IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE

GCU Clock - - 2 GE 2 GE
a

GOU IP A, and Abis Abis and A 2 GE 2 GE


a

GOU IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE


c

GOU IP Abis, A, and Gb Abis, A, and Gb 4 GE 20 GE


d

OIUa Abis_TDM A, Abis, Ater, and Cannot be shared 2 GE 2 GE


Pb by multiple
Ater_TDM interfaces
Pb_TDM

A_TDM

OMU OAM (OM - - 2 GE 2 GE


a management)

OMU OAM (OM - - 2 GE 2 GE


b management)

OMU OAM (OM - - 2 GE 20 GE


c management)

PEUa FR Abis, and Gb, A Cannot be shared 2 GE 2 GE


by multiple
HDLC interfaces
IP

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 85


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Boar Logical Function Interface Shared by Backplane Backplane


ds Supported Bandwidth of Bandwidth of
the Board When the Board When
the SCUa Board the SCUb Board
Is Installed in Is Installed in
the Same the Same
Subrack Subrack

POUc TDM A, Abis, Gb, Ater, l Abis, Ater, Gb, 4 GE 20 GE


and Pb and Pb (the Gb
interface and
the Pb
interface do
not share a
board)
l A and Gb

IP Abis and Ater

SCUa MAC Switching - - - -

SCUb MAC Switching - - - -

TNUa TDM Switching - - 2 GE 2 GE

XPUa GCP (GSM BSC - - 2 GE 2 GE


control plane
processing)

RGCP (Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing)

MCP (Mathematics
Computing
Process)

XPUb GCP (GSM BSC - - 2 GE 4 GE


control plane
processing)

RGCP (Resource
management and
GSM BSC control
plane processing)

MCP (Mathematics
Computing
Process)

PAM - - - - -
U

PFCU - - - - -

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 86


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.1 DPUa Board


DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a.
6.2 DPUc Board
DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c.
6.3 DPUd Board
DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d.
6.4 DPUf Board
DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f.
6.5 DPUg Board
DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g.
6.6 EIUa Board
EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a.
6.7 FG2a Board
FG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a.
6.8 FG2c Board
FG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c.
6.9 FG2d Board
FG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d.
6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board
GCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPS
REV: a.
6.11 GOUa Board
GOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a.
6.12 GOUc Board
GOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c.
6.13 GOUd Board
GOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d.
6.14 MDMC Board
MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.
6.15 OIUa Board
OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a.
6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board
OMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b.
6.17 OMUc Board
OMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c.
6.18 PAMU Board
PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 87


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.19 PEUa Board


PEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a.
6.20 PFCU Board
PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.
6.21 POUc Board
POUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c.
6.22 SCUa Board
SCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a.
6.23 SCUb Board
SCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b.
6.24 TNUa Board
TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In a
BSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to be
configured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the
MPS, EPS, and TCS.
6.25 XPUa Board
XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.26 XPUb Board
XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb
boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.
6.27 WOPB Board
WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 88


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.1 DPUa Board


DPUa refers to Data Processing Unit REV:a.
The DPUa board is optional. It can be installed in the TCS. Install at least two boards in each
subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of
available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to
calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered
to customers during the marketing phase. When E1/T1 interface boards are installed in the TCS,
install the DPUa boards in slots 4 to 5 and 9 to 13. When STM-1 interface boards are installed
in the TCS, install the DPUa boards in slots 1 to 5 and 8 to 13.

6.1.1 Functions of the DPUa Board


The DPUa board processes GSM voice services.
The DPUa board has 22 logical subsystems.
The DPUa board performs the following functions:
l Encodes and decodes voice services
l Provides data service rate adaptation
l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l Provides the voice enhancement function
l Detects voice faults automatically

6.1.2 Panel of the DPUa Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUa board.
Figure 6-1 shows the panel of the DPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 89


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-1 Panel of the DPUa board

6.1.3 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.

Table 6-2 LEDs on the DPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 90


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

6.1.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUa Board


The technical specifications of the DPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative humidity.
Table 6-3 describes the technical specifications of the DPUa board.

Table 6-3 Technical specifications of the DPUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 60 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs

6.2 DPUc Board


DPUc refers to Data Processing Unit REV:c.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 91


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

The DPUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least two
boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and
the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed
and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will
be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUc board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUc board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUc board can be installed in slots 0 to
5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.2.1 Functions of the DPUc Board


The DPUc board processes GSM voice services.
The DPUc board has 22 logical subsystems.
The DPUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions
– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
function if the A interface uses IP transmission.
– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission.
l Encodes and decodes voice services
– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUc board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
function if the A interface uses TDM transmission.
– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUc board in the TCS performs the preceding function.
l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in A
over TDM mode.
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of speech services.
l Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDM
mode.
l Detects voice faults automatically

6.2.2 Panel of the DPUc Board


There are only LEDs on the DPUc board.
Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the DPUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 92


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-2 Panel of the DPUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 93


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.2.3 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 6-4 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or


it is abnormal.

6.2.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUc Board


The technical specifications of the DPUc board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-5 describes the technical specifications of the DPUc board.

Table 6-5 Technical specifications of the DPUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 94


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability Supporting 960 TCH/Fs; supporting 3,740


Interworking Function(IWF) flow numbers

6.3 DPUd Board


DPUd refers to Data Processing Unit REV:d.
The DPUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards in
each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number
of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how
to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be
delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUd board can be
installed in 0 to 5, 8 to 11, or 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUd board can be installed in slots 0
to 5, 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUd boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.3.1 Functions of the DPUd Board


The DPUd board processes GSM PS services.
The DPUd board has 22 logical subsystems.
The DPUd board performs the following functions:
l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
l Processes packet links
l Detects packet faults automatically

6.3.2 Panel of the DPUd Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUd board.
Figure 6-3 shows the panel of the DPUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 95


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-3 Panel of the DPUd board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 96


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.3.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-6 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 6-6 LEDs on the DPUd board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF The board is functional.


for 1s

ON for 0.125s and The board is in loading state.


OFF for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it


is abnormal.

6.3.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUd Board


The technical specifications of the DPUd board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-7 describes the technical specifications of the DPUd board.

Table 6-7 Technical specifications of the DPUd board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 49.40 W

Weight 1.26 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 97


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024


simultaneously active PDCHs where signals
are coded in MCS9
l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to
48 simultaneously active PDCHs where
signals are coded in MCS9

6.4 DPUf Board


DPUf refers to Data Processing Unit REV:f.
The DPUf board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. Install at least two
boards in each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and
the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed
and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will
be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUf board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUf board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27. For the TCS, the DPUf board can be installed in slots 0 to
5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUe boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.4.1 Functions of the DPUf Board


The DPUf board processes GSM voice services.
The DPUf board has 48 logical subsystems.
The DPUf board performs the following functions:
l Provides the speech format conversion and data forwarding functions
– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
functions if the BTS uses IP transmission.
– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
functions if the BTS uses IP or HDLC transmission.
l Encodes and decodes voice services
– In BM/TC combined mode, the DPUf board in the MPS or EPS performs the preceding
functions if the BTS uses TDM transmission.
– In BM/TC separated mode, the DPUf board in the TCS performs the preceding function.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 98


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides the Tandem Free Operation (TFO) function. This function is supported only in A
over TDM mode.
When the calling MS and the called MS use the same voice coding scheme, the voice signals
are encoded only once at the calling MS side and decoded only once at the called MS side.
This avoids repeated encoding and decoding and improves the quality of voice services.
l Provides the voice enhancement function. This function is supported only in A over TDM
mode.
l Detects voice faults automatically

6.4.2 Panel of the DPUf Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUf board.
Figure 6-4 shows the panel of the DPUf board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 99


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-4 Panel of the DPUf board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 100


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.4.3 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-8 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.

Table 6-8 LEDs on the DPUf board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

6.4.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUf Board


The technical specifications of the DPUf board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-9 describes the technical specifications of the DPUf board.

Table 6-9 Technical specifications of the DPUf board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 70 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 101


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Supporting 1,920 TCHFs


l Supporting 7,680 IWF flow numbers in the
case of all-IP networking; Supporting 3,840
IWF flow numbers in the case of Abis over
TDM or Ater over TDM

6.5 DPUg Board


DPUg refers to Data Processing Unit REV:g.

The DPUg board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS. Install at least two boards in
each subrack. The number of boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number
of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how
to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be
delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the DPUg board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 11, and slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the DPUg board can be
installed in slots 0 to 5, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the DPUg boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.5.1 Functions of the DPUg Board


The DPUg board processes GSM PS services.

The DPUg board has 14 logical subsystems.

The DPUg board performs the following functions:

l Processes the PS services on up to 1,024 simultaneously active PDCHs where signals are
coded in MCS9
l Processes packet links
l Detects packet faults automatically

6.5.2 Panel of the DPUg Board


There are only LEDs on the panel of the DPUg board.

Figure 6-5 shows the panel of the DPUg board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 102


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-5 Panel of the DPUg board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 103


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.5.3 LEDs on the DPUg Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-10 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.

Table 6-10 LEDs on the DPUg board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF The board is functional.


for 1s

ON for 0.125s and The board is in loading state.


OFF for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it


is abnormal.

6.5.4 Technical Specifications of the DPUg Board


The technical specifications of the DPUg board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and processing capability.

Table 6-11 describes the technical specifications of the DPUg board.

Table 6-11 Technical specifications of the DPUg board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 62 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 104


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability l Processing the PS services on up to 1,024


simultaneously active PDCHs where signals
are coded in MCS9
l Processing in a cell the PS services on up to
110 simultaneously active PDCHs where
signals are coded in MCS9

6.6 EIUa Board


EIUa refers to 32-port E1/T1 circuit Interface Unit REV:a.
The EIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the
boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details
on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. For the MPS, the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
the EIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.
NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the EIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.6.1 Functions of the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides E1/T1 transmission for the BSC6900.
The EIUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides four E1/T1 electrical ports for TDM transmission
l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission rate is 2.048
Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s
l Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
l Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol
l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby EIUa
boards
l Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side
l Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.6.2 Panel of the EIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the EIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 105


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-6 shows the panel of the EIUa board.

Figure 6-6 Panel of the EIUa board

6.6.3 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-12 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 6-12 LEDs on the EIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 106


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.6.4 Ports on the EIUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT
port on the EIUa board.
Table 6-13 describes the ports on the EIUa board.

Table 6-13 Ports on the EIUa board


Port Function Connector Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and DB44


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and DB44


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and DB44


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and DB44


receive E1/T1 signals on
channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock SMB male connector
signal outputs, used to transmit
the clock signals obtained from
the line clock for system
reference

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. SMB male connector


The clock signals are used for
testing.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 107


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.6.5 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 6-7 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Figure 6-7 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 6-14 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 108


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-14 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board


DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75- Setting for
ohm Coaxial 120-ohm
Cable Twisted Pair
Cable

S1 8 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7

7 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15

6 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23

5 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31

1-4 Reserved - -

S3 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7

S4 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15

S5 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23

S6 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31

Table 6-15 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 6-15 Description of the different DIP switches


DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of the
board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 109


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end
of the E1/T1 signals

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.
l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

6.6.6 Technical Specifications of the EIUa Board


The technical specifications of the EIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-16 describes the hardware specifications of the EIUa board.

Table 6-16 Hardware specifications of the EIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 28.60 W

Weight 1.16 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-17 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-17 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 960

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 110


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Ater CIC(16K) 3,840

Pb CIC(16K) 3,840

6.7 FG2a Board


FG2a is short for 8-port FE or 2-port electronic GE interface unit REV: a.
The board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements and
the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be installed
and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will
be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2a board can be
installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the FG2a board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the FG2a boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.7.1 Functions of the FG2a Board


As an interface board, the FG2a board provides IP over Ethernet.
The FG2a board performs the following functions:
l Provides eight channels over FE ports or two channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Supports the A, Abis, and Gb interfaces

6.7.2 Panel of the FG2a Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2a board.
Figure 6-8 shows the panel of the FG2a board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 111


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-8 Panel of the FG2a board

6.7.3 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-18 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 6-18 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 112


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.7.4 Ports on the FG2a Board


There are six 10M/100M Ethernet ports, two 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, and two clock
signal output ports on the FG2a board.
Table 6-19 describes the ports on the FG2a board.

Table 6-19 Ports on the FG2a board


Port Function Connector
Type

FE(1) to FE(3) 10M/100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit RJ45


10/100M signals

FE/GE(0) 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 10/100/1000M signals

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 113


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.7.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2a Board


The technical specifications of the FG2a board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-20 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2a board.

Table 6-20 Hardware specifications of the FG2a board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 38.48 W

Weight 1.36 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-21 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-21 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second)

Abis TRX 384

A Speech service in the CS domain 6,144 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput 128 Mbit/s


(physical layer)

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

6.8 FG2c Board


FG2c is short for 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:c.
The board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boards to be
installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 114


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can be
installed in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the
SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are
occupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.8.1 Functions of the FG2c Board


As an interface board, the FG2c board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2c board performs the following functions:
l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels
over GE ports
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The FG2c board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The FG2c board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.8.2 Panel of the FG2c Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2c board.
Figure 6-9 shows the panel of the FG2c board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 115


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-9 Panel of the FG2c board

6.8.3 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-22 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 6-22 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 116


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.8.4 Ports on the FG2c Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2c board.
Table 6-23 describes the ports on the FG2c board.

Table 6-23 Ports on the FG2c board


Port Function Connector
Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M RJ45


signals

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 100/1000M signals

6.8.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2c Board


The technical specifications of the FG2c board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 117


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.
Table 6-24 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2c board.

Table 6-24 Hardware specifications of the FG2c board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-25 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-25 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per


Second)

Abis TRX 2,048

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical 1,024 Mbit/s


layer)

6.9 FG2d Board


FG2d refers to 12-port FE or 4-port electronic GE interface unit REV:d.
The FG2d board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the
boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details
on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. For the MPS, the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS,
the FG2d board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 118


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.9.1 Functions of the FG2d Board


As an interface board, the FG2d board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The FG2d board performs the following functions:
l Provides twelve channels over FE ports or eight channels over FE ports and four channels
over GE ports
l Provides the link aggregation function at the MAC layer
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the transmission of data over all its Ethernet ports on the basis of the synchronized
clock signals
l Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The FG2d board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The FG2d board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission
port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as
establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.9.2 Panel of the FG2d Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the FG2d board.
Figure 6-10 shows the panel of the FG2d board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 119


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-10 Panel of the FG2d board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 120


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.9.3 LEDs on the FG2d Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-26 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.

Table 6-26 LEDs on the FG2d board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.9.4 Ports on the FG2d Board


There are four 100/1000BASE-T ports and eight 100BASE-T ports on the FG2d board.
Table 6-27 describes the ports on the FG2d board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 121


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-27 Ports on the FG2d board

Port Function Connector


Type

100BASE-T 100M Ethernet ports, used to transmit 100M RJ45


signals

100/1000BASE-T 100M/1000M Ethernet ports, used to RJ45


transmit 100/1000M signals

6.9.5 Technical Specifications of the FG2d Board


The technical specifications of the FG2d board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-28 describes the hardware specifications of the FG2d board.

Table 6-28 Hardware specifications of the FG2d board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 85.4 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-29 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-29 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per


Second)

Abis TRX 1,536

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 122


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Session setup/release times 5000/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Session setup/release times 5000/s

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical 512 Mbit/s


layer)

Number of UDP(User Datagram Protocol) ports 129000

NOTE

l The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.
l The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an A/Abis-
interface board.

6.10 GCUa and GCGa Board


GCUa is short for General Clock Unit REV: a. GCGa is short for General Clock Unit with GPS
REV: a.

The GCUa or GCGa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed on the BSC6900. The
boards must be installed in slots 12 and 13 in the MPS.

6.10.1 Functions of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The GCUa/GCGa board performs the clock function.

The GCUa/GCGa board performs the following functions:

l Extracts timing signals from the external synchronization timing port and from the
synchronization line signals, processes the timing signals, and provides the timing signals
and the reference clock for the entire system
l Performs the fast pull-in and holdover functions on the system clock
l Generates RFN signals for the system
l Supports active/standby switchover. The standby GCUa/GCGa board traces the clock
phase of the active GCUa/GCGa board. This ensures the smooth output of the clock phase
in the case of active/standby switchover.
l Receives and processes the clock signals and the positioning information from the GPS
card. (Only the GCGa board supports this function.)

6.10.2 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Figure 6-11 shows the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 123


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-11 Panel of the GCUa/GCGa board

6.10.3 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-30 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-30 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 124


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

6.10.4 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are 17 ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.
Table 6-31 describes the ports on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-31 Ports on the GCUa/GCGa board


Port Function Connector Type

ANT Port for the GPS antenna. This port on the GCGa SMA male
board is used to receive the timing signals and connector
positioning information from the GPS satellite. This
port is not used on the GCUa board.

CLKOUT0 to Ports for providing synchronization clock signals. RJ45


CLKOUT9 The ten ports are used to provide 8 kHz clock signals
and 1PPS clock signals.

COM0 Serial port, which receives only commissioning RJ45


data and discards all other data automatically.

COM1 Port for RS422-level 8 kHz clock signals RJ45

TESTOUT Output port for clock signals. The clock signals are SMB male
used for testing. connector

TESTIN Input port for testing external clock signals SMB male
connector

CLKIN0 and Input port for BITS clock signals and line clock SMB male
CLKIN1 signals connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 125


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.10.5 Technical Specifications of the GCUa/GCGa Board


The technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board consist of the dimensions, power supply,
power consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and clock accuracy grade.

Table 6-32 describes the technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 6-32 Technical specifications of the GCUa/GCGa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption GCUa: 20 W; GCGa: 25 W

Weight GCUa: 1.1 kg; GCGa: 1.18 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Clock accuracy grade Grade three

6.11 GOUa Board


GOUa is short for 2-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV: a.

The GOUa board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site
requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards
that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles.
This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the
board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the GOUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.11.1 Functions of the GOUa Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUa board supports IP over Ethernet.

The GOUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides two channels over GE optical ports, which are used for IP transmission

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 126


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing


l Supports the A and Abis interfaces

6.11.2 Panel of the GOUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-12 shows the panel of the GOUa board.

Figure 6-12 Panel of the GOUa board

6.11.3 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-33 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 127


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-33 LEDs on the GOUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.11.4 Ports on the GOUa Board


There are two optical ports and two clock signal output ports on the GOUa board.
Table 6-34 describes the ports on the GOUa board.

Table 6-34 Ports on the GOUa board


Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

2M0 and Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male connector
2M1

6.11.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUa Board


The technical specifications of the GOUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-35 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 128


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-35 Hardware specifications of the GOUa board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 37.30 W

Weight 1.20 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-36 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-36 Specifications of the board processing capability


Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 600,000 PPS(Packet Per Second)

Abis TRX 384

Session setup/release times 500/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 6,144 Erlang

Session setup/release times 500/s

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 23,000

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/A-
interface board.

Table 6-37 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 129


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-37 Specifications of the optical ports


Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE, Optical transceiver, GE,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typical 10 km 0.5 km
transmission
distance

Max output optical -3 dBm -2.5 dBm


power

Min output optical -9 dBm -9.5 dBm


power

Saturation optical -3 dBm 0 dBm


power

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.12 GOUc Board


GOUc is short for 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV :c.
The board is optional. The number of the boards to be installed depends on site requirements
and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards that can be
installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This
document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is
configured with the SCUa board, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS.
When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed
in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are occupied, the board can be installed in slots 14, 15.

6.12.1 Functions of the GOUc Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUc board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The GOUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 130


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l The GOUc board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The GOUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter reporting, as well as
transmission port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions,
such as establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.12.2 Panel of the GOUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-13 shows the panel of the GOUc board.

Figure 6-13 Panel of the GOUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 131


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.12.3 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-38 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 6-38 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.12.4 Ports on the GOUc Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUc board.
Table 6-39 describes the ports on the GOUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 132


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-39 Ports on the GOUc board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.12.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUc Board


The technical specifications of the GOUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-40 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUc board.

Table 6-40 Hardware specifications of the GOUc board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-41 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-41 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per


Second)

Abis TRX 2,048

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 133


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Session setup/release times 3,000/s

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Session setup/release times 5,000/s

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical 1,024 Mbit/s


layer)

Number of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) ports 129,000

NOTE

The number of session setup/release times indicates the signaling processing capacity of an Abis/A-interface
board.

Table 6-42 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-42 Specifications of the optical ports


Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE, Optical transceiver, GE,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typical 10 km 0.5 km
transmission
distance

Max output optical -3 dBm -2.5 dBm


power

Min output optical -9 dBm -9.5 dBm


power

Saturation optical -3 dBm 0 dBm


power

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.13 GOUd Board


GOUd refers to 4-port packet over GE Optical interface Unit REV:d.
The GOUd board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS and EPS. The number of the boards
to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 134


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. When the MPS or EPS is configured with the SCUa board, the board can be
installed in slots 4, 5 and 14 to 27 in the MPS or EPS. When the MPS or EPS is configured with
the SCUb board, the board is preferentially installed in slots 16 to 27. After slots 16 to 27 are
occupied, the board can be installed in slots 4, 5 and 14, 15.

6.13.1 Functions of the GOUd Board


As an optical interface board, the GOUd board supports IP over Ethernet transmission.
The GOUd board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over GE ports
l Provides the routing-based backup and load sharing
l Supports the Abis, A, and Gb interfaces
NOTE

l The GOUd board does not support the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s half duplex mode.
l The GOUd board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission
port management and maintenance. CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as
establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.

6.13.2 Panel of the GOUd Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the GOUd board.
Figure 6-14 shows the panel of the GOUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 135


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-14 Panel of the GOUd board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 136


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.13.3 LEDs on the GOUd Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 6-43 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.

Table 6-43 LEDs on the GOUd board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.13.4 Ports on the GOUd Board


There are four optical ports on the GOUd board.
Table 6-44 describes the ports on the GOUd board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 137


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-44 Ports on the GOUd board

Port Function Connector Type

RX Optical port, used to transmit and receive optical LC/PC


signals. TX refers to the transmitting optical port,
TX and RX refers to the receiving optical port.

6.13.5 Technical Specifications of the GOUd Board


The technical specifications of the GOUd board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-45 describes the hardware specifications of the GOUd board.

Table 6-45 Hardware specifications of the GOUd board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 65.90 W

Weight 1.40 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-46 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-46 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Maximum Packet Forwarding Rate(UL+DL) 2,200,000 PPS(Packet Per


Second)

Abis TRX 1,535

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 138


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Gb Maximum payload throughput (physical 512 Mbit/s


layer)

NOTE

The preceding specifications are the maximum capability regarding the corresponding service.

Table 6-47 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-47 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, GE, Optical transceiver, GE,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 850 nm

Operating data rate 1.25 Gbit/s 1.25 Gbit/s

Typical 10 km 0.5 km
transmission
distance

Max output optical -3 dBm -2.5 dBm


power

Min output optical -9 dBm -9.5 dBm


power

Saturation optical -3 dBm 0 dBm


power

Receiver sensitivity -20 dBm -17 dBm

6.14 MDMC Board


MDMC refers to Distribution Monitor and Communication board. It is configured in the
common power distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one
MDMC board.

6.14.1 Functions of the MDMC Board


The MDMC board is used to monitor the common power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 139


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

The MDMC board performs the following functions:

l Detects the voltage of two -48 V power inputs


l Detects one output of external temperature sensor
l Detects one output of external humidity sensor
l Detects two lightning protection circuits
l Detects the status of the power switches for six power outputs
l Provides audible and visual alarms
l Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, so as to report the working status of the power
distribution box and exchange operation & maintenance (O&M) information

6.14.2 Panel of the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs and a mute switch on the panel of the MDMC board.

Figure 6-15 shows the panel of the MDMC board.

Figure 6-15 Panel of the MDMC board

(1) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.14.3 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-48 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 140


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-48 LEDs on the MDMC board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The MDMC board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The MDMC board is not working or it


for 0.25s does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.

OFF The power supply to the MDMC board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.14.4 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 6-16 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.

Figure 6-16 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.

To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 6-49.

Table 6-49 DIP switch on the MDMC board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 141


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 6-49.

6.15 OIUa Board


OIUa refers to 1-port channelized Optical STM-1 Interface Unit REV:a.

The OIUa board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, and TCS. The number of the
boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details
on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see
BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. For the MPS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS/
TCS, the OIUa board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the OIUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.15.1 Functions of the OIUa Board


The OIUa board provides STM-1 transmission over the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces.

The OIUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides one STM-1 port for TDM transmission


l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby OIUa boards
l Provides one channelized STM-1
l Processes signals according to the LAPD protocol
l Processes signals according to the SS7 MTP2 protocol
l Provides the OM links when the TCS is configured on the MSC side
l Supports the A, Abis, Ater, and Pb interfaces

6.15.2 Panel of the OIUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the OIUa board.

Figure 6-17 shows the panel of the OIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 142


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-17 Panel of the OIUa board

6.15.3 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-50 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 6-50 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 143


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.15.4 Ports on the OIUa Board


There is one optical port, two clock signal output ports 2M0 and 2M1, and one TESTOUT port
on the OIUa board.

Table 6-51 describes the ports on the OIUa board.

Table 6-51 Ports on the OIUa board

Port Function Connect Multiple Multiple


or Type xing E1 xing T1
Port Port
Number Number

RX Receiving optical port LC 0 to 62 0 to 83

TX Transmitting optical port

2M0 and Ports for the 2.048 MHz clock signal SMB male - -
2M1 outputs, used to transmit the clock signals connector
obtained from the line clock for system
reference.

TESTO Port for clock signal outputs. The clock SMB male - -
UT signals are used for testing. connector

6.15.5 Technical Specifications of the OIUa Board


The technical specifications of the OIUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.

Table 6-52 describes the hardware specifications of the OIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 144


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-52 Hardware specifications of the OIUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The backplane


of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Power consumption 20.80 W

Weight 0.94 kg

Operating temperature 0°C to 45°C


(long-term)

Operating temperature -5°C to +55°C


(short-term)

Relative humidity (long- 5% to 85%


term)

Relative humidity 5% to 95%


(short-term)

Table 6-53 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-53 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

A CIC(64K) 1,920

Ater CIC(16K) 7,168

Pb CIC(16K) 7,168

NOTE

The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board is
configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-54 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-54 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1, Optical transceiver, STM-1,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 145


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1, Optical transceiver, STM-1,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Operating data rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Typical 15km 2 km
transmission
distance

Max output optical -8 dBm -14 dBm


power

Min output optical -15 dBm -19 dBm


power

Saturation optical -8 dBm -14 dBm


power

Receiver sensitivity -31 dBm -301 dBm

6.16 OMUa and OMUb Board


OMUa is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV:a. OMUb is short for Operation and
Maintenance Unit REV:b.

Two OMUa/OMUb boards must be configured in the BSC6900. One OMUa/OMUb board
occupies two slots. The board can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in
the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. It is recommended that the OMUa/OMUb board be installed
in slots 20 to 23 for inventory sites and in slots 24 to 27 for new sites.

NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards based on the OMUa/OMUb boards being installed
in slots 24 to 27.
l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. When
an OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb board
can be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can be
synchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board.
l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. In
scenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example,
both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.16.1 Functions of the OMUa/OMUb Board


The OMUa/OMUb board connects the LMT/M2000 and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The functions of the OMUa/OMUb board are as follows:

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 146


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,


security management, and loading management functions for the system
l Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900
system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUa board of
the BSC6900

6.16.2 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. In addition, there
are hard disks installed on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Figure 6-18 shows the panel of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Figure 6-18 Panel of the OMUa/OMUb board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED
(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) RESET button (8) SHUTDOWN button
(9) USB port (10) ETH0 Ethernet port (11) ETH1 Ethernet port (12) ETH2 Ethernet port

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 147


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

(13) COM port (14) VGA port (15) HD LEDs (16) OFFLINE LED
(17) Hard disks (18) Screws for securing the hard disk

NOTE

l To power off the OMUa/OMUb board, simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away
from the front panel of the OMUa/OMUb board. After the OFFLINE LED is on, turn off the power
switch.
l The SHUTDOWN button is used only for powering off the board in an emergency.
l The RESET button is used to reset the system. It works the same way as the reset button on a PC.
l Pressing the SHUTDOWN or RESET button may scratch the surface of OMUa hard disks. Avoid
pressing these two buttons whenever possible.

6.16.3 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 6-55 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-55 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written to.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 148


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.16.4 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC, and one
VGA port on the OMUa/OMUb board.
Table 6-56 describes the ports on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-56 Ports on the OMUa/OMUb board


Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB ports USB
only after logging in to the
operating system (OS) running on
the board. The ports does not
require a signal cable or connection
to other devices when the system
runs properly. Therefore,
equipment security is not affected.

ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for the RJ45
communication between the OMU
and the LMT/M2000.

ETH2 The port does not require a signal RJ45


cable or connection to other
devices when the system runs
properly. Therefore, equipment
security is not affected.

COM0-ALM/COM1-BMC The hardware port needs no cables DB9


for it does not communicate with
other equipment.

VGA Video port DB15

6.16.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUa/OMUb Board


This section describes the hardware configuration indexes and performance counters of the
OMUa/OMUb board, including dimensions, power supply, number of CPUs, power
consumption, weight, hard disk capacity, memory capacity, working temperature, and working
humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-57 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 149


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-57 Hardware configuration indexes

Item Index of the OMUa board Index of the OMUb board

Dimensions 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4 248 mm x 64.6 mm x 395.4


mm mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in Two -48 V DC working in


active/standby mode. The active/standby mode. The
backplane of the subrack is backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power responsible for the power
supply. supply.

Number of CPUs 4 2

Power consumption 120 W 90 W

Weight 4.0 kg 3.5 kg

Hard disk capacity 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1) 73 GB or above x 2 (RAID 1)


* *

Memory capacity 2G 2G

Temperature required when 5°C to 40°C 5°C to 40°C


working for an extended
period of time

Temperature required when 0°C to 50°C 0°C to 50°C


working for a short period of
time

Relative humidity required 5% to 85% 5% to 85%


when working for an
extended period of time

Relative humidity required 5% to 95% 5% to 95%


when working for a short
period of time

*The hard disk capacity can be 73 GB, 146 GB, or 300 GB. Hard disks will be delivered according

to the production plan of our hard disk providers.

Performance Counters
Table 6-58 lists the performance counters of the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 6-58 Performance counters

Counter Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Number of recorded The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.


alarms

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 150


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Counter Index of the OMUa/OMUb Board

Time when the standby The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU data is OMU board every second.
synchronized with the
active OMU data

Duration of the Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization between according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Duration of the Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being
switchover between the accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover
active and standby OMUs finishes in four minutes.

Duration of the OMU Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This
restart duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUa/OMUb board contains mechanical hard disk. Adverse environments, such as high
temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.

To extend the lifespan of the OMUa/OMUb board, protect it from vibration, shock, and abnormal
shutdowns.

6.17 OMUc Board


OMUc is short for Operation and Maintenance Unit REV: c.

Two boards must be configured in the BSC6900. The boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots
20 to 23, or slots 24 to 27 in the MPS at the bottom of the MPR. Slots 24 to 25 are recommended.

NOTE

l This document describes the installation of other boards on the basis that the OMUc boards are installed in
slots 24 and 25.
l Different types of OMU boards can be configured in active and standby slots only for a short period. When
an OMUc board is used to replace an OMUa/OMUb board, the OMUc board and the OMUa/OMUb board
can be inserted into the slots and co-exist for a short period (less than one hour), so that data can be
synchronized from the OMUa/OMUb board to the OMUc board.
l Different types of OMU boards cannot be configured in active and standby slots for a long period. In
scenarios of long-term operation, the active and standby OMU boards must be of the same type. For example,
both active and standby OMU boards must be OMUa boards or OMUc boards.

6.17.1 Functions of the OMUc Board


The OMUc board works as a bridge for the communication between the Local Maintenance
Terminal (LMT) and the other boards in the BSC6900.

The OMUc board performs the following functions:

l Performs the configuration management, performance management, fault management,


security management, and loading management functions for the system

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 151


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Enables LMT or M2000 users to perform operation and maintenance on the BSC6900
system to control the communication between the LMT or M2000 and the SCUb board of
the BSC6900

6.17.2 Panel of the OMUc Board


There are LEDs, ports, and buttons on the panel of the OMUc board.
Figure 6-19 shows the panel of the OMUc board.

Figure 6-19 Panel of the OMUc board

(1) Captive screw (2) Ejector lever (3) Self-locking latch (4) RUN LED

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 152


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

(5) ALM LED (6) ACT LED (7) POWER Button (8) HDD LED
(9) OFL LED (10) COM port (11) ETH0 Ethernet port (12) ETH1 Ethernet port
(13) VGA port (14) USB port (15) ETH2 Ethernet port

NOTE

To power off the OMUc board, you need to simultaneously pivot the top and bottom ejector levers away
from the front panel of the OMUc board. After the OFL (OFFLINE) LED is on, turn off the power switch.

6.17.3 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 6-59 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 6-59 LEDs on the OMUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written to.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 153


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.17.4 Ports on the OMUc Board


There are four USB ports, three GE ports, one serial port COM0, and one VGA port on the
OMUc board.

Table 6-60 describes the ports on the OMUc board.

Table 6-60 Ports on the OMUc board

Port Function Connector Type

USB0-1 and USB2-3 Operators can use the USB ports USB
only after logging in to the
operating system (OS) running on
the board. The hardware ports need
no cables or connecting to other
equipment and thereby do not
affect the equipment safety.

ETH0 to ETH1 The hardware ports are used for the RJ45
communication between the OMU
and the LMT/M2000.

ETH2 The hardware ports need no cables RJ45


or connecting to other equipment
and thereby do not affect the
equipment safety.

COM The hardware port needs no cables DB9


for it does not communicate with
other equipment.

VGA Port for the video. DB15

6.17.5 Technical Specifications of the OMUc Board


The technical specifications of the OMUc board include hardware configuration indexes and
performance counters. The hardware configuration indexes refer to the dimensions, power
supply, number of CPUs, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Hardware Configuration Indexes


Table 6-61 lists the hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board.

Table 6-61 Hardware configuration indexes of the OMUc board

Item Index of the OMUc board

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 154


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Index of the OMUc board

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode. The


backplane of the subrack is responsible for the power supply.

Number of CPUs 6

Power consumption 90 W

Weight 2.5 kg

Hard disk capacity 500 GB

Memory capacity 8 GB

Temperature required when 5°C to 40°C


working for an extended
period of time

Temperature required when 0°C to 50°C


working for a short period of
time

Relative humidity required 5% to 85%


when working for an
extended period of time

Relative humidity required 5% to 95%


when working for a short
period of time

Performance Counters
Table 6-62 describes the performance counters of the OMUc board.

Table 6-62 Performance counters of the OMUc board


Item Index of the OMUc board

Number of recorded The maximum number of recorded alarms is 150,000.


alarms

Time when the standby The standby OMU synchronizes its data with that of the active
OMU data is OMU board every second.
synchronized with the
active OMU data

Duration of the Seven minutes. The time needed for the synchronization varies
synchronization between according to the size and quantity of the files to be synchronized.
the active OMU files and
standby OMU files

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 155


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Index of the OMUc board

Duration of the Refers to the time from the request for OMU switchover being
switchover between the accepted to the switchover being finished. The switchover
active and standby OMUs finishes in four minutes.

Duration of the OMU Duration of the OMU restart caused by an OMU fault. This
restart duration lasts for about three minutes.

The OMUc board contains a mechanical hard disk. Due to the short lifespan of the mechanical
hard disk, the lifespan of the OMUc board is about 5 years. Adverse environments, such as high
temperature and high altitude, shorten board lifespan.
To ensure the lifespan of the OMUc board, the OMUc board must be protected against vibration,
shock and abnormal shutdown.

6.18 PAMU Board


PAMU refers to Power Allocation Monitoring Unit. The PAMU board is installed in the power
distribution box at the top of the cabinet. Each power distribution box accommodates one PAMU
board.

6.18.1 Functions of the PAMU Board


The PAMU board is used to monitor the power distribution box at the top of the BSC6900
cabinet.
The PAMU board performs the following functions:
l Detects the voltage of six -48 V power inputs and reports related alarms
l Detects the status of the power switches for 20 power outputs and reports related alarms
l Enables the switchover when faults occur in the serial port communication, and
communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board
l Provides two RS485 and two RS232 asynchronous serial ports

6.18.2 Panel of the PAMU Board


On the panel of the PAMU board, there are two LEDs and a mute switch.
Figure 6-20 shows the panel of the PAMU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 156


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-20 Panel of the PAMU board

(1) RUN LED (2) ALM LED (3) Mute switch

NOTE

The mute switch is set to determine whether an audible alarm is generated.


l If you set the mute switch to ON, the power distribution box generates an audible alarm when it is
faulty.
l If you set the mute switch to OFF, the power distribution box does not generate an audible alarm when
it is faulty.

6.18.3 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.

Table 6-63 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Table 6-63 LEDs on the PAMU board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 157


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

6.18.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 6-21 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Figure 6-21 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.

To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
6-64.

Table 6-64 DIP switch on the PAMU board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 158


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 6-64.

6.18.5 Technical Specifications of the PAMU Board


The technical specifications of the PAMU board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, and weight.

Table 6-65 describes the technical specifications of the PAMU board.

Table 6-65 Technical specifications of the PAMU board

Item Specification

Dimensions 340 mm × 72 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode

Power consumption 15 W

Weight 0.2 kg

6.19 PEUa Board


PEUa is short for 32-port Packet over E1/T1/J1 interface Unit REV: a.

The PEUa board is optional.The number of the boards to be installed depends on site
requirements and the number of available slots. For details on the maximum number of boards
that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see BSC6900 Configuration Principles.
This document will be delivered to customers during the marketing phase. For the MPS, the
board can be installed in slots 14 to 23. For the EPS, the board can be installed in slots 14 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the PEUa boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.19.1 Functions of the PEUa Board


As an interface board, the PEUa board supports E1/T1 transmission.

The PEUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides 32 channels of IP over PPP/MLPPP over E1/T1


l Provides 128 PPP links or 32 MLPPP groups, each MLPPP group containing 8 MLPPP
links
l Provides the Tributary Protect Switch (TPS) function between the active and standby PEUa
boards
l Transmits, receives, encodes, and decodes 32 channels of E1s/T1s. The E1 transmission
rate is 2.048 Mbit/s; the T1 transmission rate is 1.544 Mbit/s.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 159


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Supports the Abis and Gb , and A interfaces

6.19.2 Panel of the PEUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-22 shows the panel of the PEUa board.

Figure 6-22 Panel of the PEUa board

6.19.3 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 6-66 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 6-66 LEDs on the PEUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 160


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.19.4 Ports on the PEUa Board


There are four E1/T1 ports and two clock signal output ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-67 describes the ports on the PEUa board.

Table 6-67 Ports on the PEUa board

Port Function Connector


Type

E1/T1 (0-7) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 0-7

E1/T1 (8-15) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 8-15

E1/T1 (16-23) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 16-23

E1/T1 (24-31) E1/T1 port, used to transmit and receive E1/T1 DB44
signals on channels 24-31

2M0 and 2M1 Port for 2 MHz clock signal outputs SMB male
connector

6.19.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.

Figure 6-23 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 161


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-23 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 162


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 6-23, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 6-23 is to
turn inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4,
S6, or S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits
of S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 6-68 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 6-68 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 163


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

6.19.6 Technical Specifications of the PEUa Board


The technical specifications of the PEUa board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the board processing capability. The hardware specifications consist of the
dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature, and relative
humidity.

Table 6-69 describes the hardware specifications of the PEUa board.

Table 6-69 Hardware specifications of the PEUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 164


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power consumption 27.53 W

Weight 1.30 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Table 6-70 describes the specifications of the board processing capability.

Table 6-70 Specifications of the board processing capability

Item Specification

Abis TRX 384

Gb Maximum payload 64 Mbit/s


throughput (physical layer)

A CIC (64K) 6144

6.20 PFCU Board


PFCU refers to Fan Control Unit. The PFCU board is installed in the front of the fan box. Each
fan box is configured with one PFCU board.

6.20.1 Functions of the PFCU Board


The PFCU board is used to monitor the fan box.

The PFCU board performs the following functions:

l Monitors the working status of the fans in the fan box and displays the status through the
LED
l Communicates with the SCUa/SCUb board, to report the working status of the fan box
l Collects temperature information and detects the temperature through temperature sensors
l Provides Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) control signals which are used to adjust the fan
speed
l Reports the working status and alarms of the fans in the fan box through the LED

6.20.2 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 165


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 6-24 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-24 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-71. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 6-71 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)

DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description


Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 6-25 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 6-25 DIP switch on the PFCU board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 166


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 6-72. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Table 6-72 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

6.20.3 Technical Specifications of the PFCU Board


The technical specifications of the PFCU board consist of the dimensions, input voltage range,
frequency of PWM signals, detectable temperature range, and requirement for fan speed
adjustment.
Table 6-73 describes the technical specifications of the PFCU board.

Table 6-73 Technical specifications of the PFCU board


Item Specification

Dimensions 270 mm x 35 mm

Input voltage range -40 V DC to -57 V DC

Frequency of PWM signals 1 kHz

Detectable temperature range -5°C to +55°C(basic requirement)

Requirement for fan speed adjustment The speed of the fans can be adjusted from 55%
to 100% of the full speed.

6.21 POUc Board


POUc refers to 4-port TDM/IP over channelized Optical STM-1/OC-3 interface Unit REV:c.
The POUc board is optional. It can be installed in the MPS, EPS, or TCS. The number of the
boards to be installed depends on site requirements and the number of available slots. For details
on the maximum number of boards that can be installed and how to calculate this number, see

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 167


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

BSC6900 Configuration Principles. This document will be delivered to customers during the
marketing phase. When the MPS/EPS/TCS is configured with the SCUa board. For the MPS/
EPS/TCS, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14 to 23. When the MPS/EPS/
TCS is configured with the SCUb board, the POUc board can be installed in slots 4 to 5 and 14
to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed
in slots 24 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 24 to 25 of the MPS, the POUc boards can be installed in slots
24 to 25 of the MPS.

6.21.1 Functions of the POUc Board


As an interface board, the POUc board supports TDM/IP over channelized STM-1/OC-3
transmission.
The POUc board performs the following functions:
l Provides four channels over channelized optical STM-1/OC-3 ports based on TDM/IP
protocol
l Supports the PPP function
l Extracts line clock signals
l Provides the Automatic Protection Switching (APS) function between the active and
standby POUc boards
l Supports the A, Abis, Gb, Ater, and Pb interfaces
NOTE
The POUc board has two CPUs: CPU0 and CPU1. These two CPUs perform different functions when the
ports on the POUc board use different transmission modes.
l When the ports on the POUc board use IP transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management plane
functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter, as well as transmission
port management and maintenance, and CPU1 mainly performs the control plane functions, such as
establishment and clearing of channels for data flows.
l When the ports on the POUc board use TDM transmission, CPU0 mainly performs the management
plane and control plane functions, such as board management, alarm reporting, performance counter,
transmission port management and maintenance, as well as establishment and clearing of channels for
data flows, and CPU1 mainly processes the signaling according to the MTP2 and Ater SL protocols.

6.21.2 Panel of the POUc Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the POUc board.
Figure 6-26 shows the panel of the POUc board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 168


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-26 Panel of the POUc board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 169


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.21.3 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 6-74 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 6-74 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

6.21.4 Ports on the POUc Board


There are four optical ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-75 describes the ports on the POUc board.

Table 6-75 Ports on the POUc board

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

0 RX Receiving LC/PC 0 to 62 0 to 83
optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 170


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Port Port Function Connector Multiplexing Multiplexing


Num Type E1 Port T1 Port
ber Number Number

1 RX Receiving LC/PC 63 to 125 84 to 167


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

2 RX Receiving LC/PC 126 to 188 168 to 251


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

3 RX Receiving LC/PC 189 to 251 252 to 335


optical port

TX Transmitting
optical port

6.21.5 Technical Specifications of the POUc Board


The technical specifications of the POUc board consist of hardware specifications and
specifications of the optical ports and board processing capability. The hardware specifications
consist of the dimensions, power supply, power consumption, weight, operating temperature,
and relative humidity.
Table 6-76 describes the hardware specifications of the POUc board.

Table 6-76 Hardware specifications of the POUc board


Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 77.25 W

Weight 1.50 kg

Temperature required when working for a 0°C to 45°C


long time

Temperature required when working for a -5°C to +55°C


short time

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 85%


for a long time

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 171


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 95%


for a short time

Table 6-77 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM
transmission mode.

Table 6-77 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in TDM transmission
mode
Item Specification with Specification with
the DPUc Board the DPUf Board
Configured Configured

Abis TRX 512 512

A CIC (64K) 3906 7680

Ater CIC (16K) 7168 7168

Pb CIC (16K) 7168 7168

Gb Maximum payload 504 Mbit/s 504 Mbit/s


throughput (physical layer)

NOTE

When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 3906 CICs if the
DPUf and DPUc boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed.
When the A interface is carried by the POUc board, the POUc board supports a maximum of 7680 CICs if the
following conditions are met:
l At least four DPUf boards are configured in the same subrack where the POUc board is installed.
l The POUc board and at least four DPUf boards are managed by the same main control XPUa/XPUb board.
The specifications described in the preceding table apply to boards in active/standby mode. If a board is
configured in independent mode, the specifications cannot be reached.

Table 6-78 describes the specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP
transmission mode.

Table 6-78 Specifications of the processing capability of the POUc board in IP transmission
mode
Item Specification

Abis TRX 2048

A Speech service in the CS domain 23,040 Erlang

Ater CIC (16K) 23,040 (The TC subrack supports


only 13,000 CICs.)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 172


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-79 describes the specifications of the optical ports.

Table 6-79 Specifications of the optical ports

Item Specification

Optical transceiver, STM-1, Optical transceiver, STM-1,


Single-Mode Multi-Mode

Mode Single mode Multi-mode

Connector type LC/PC LC/PC

Center wavelength 1,310 nm 1,310 nm

Operating data rate 155 Mbit/s 155 Mbit/s

Typical 15km 2 km
transmission
distance

Max output optical -8 dBm -14 dBm


power

Min output optical -15 dBm -19 dBm


power

Saturation optical -8 dBm -14 dBm


power

Receiver sensitivity -31 dBm -301 dBm

6.22 SCUa Board


SCUa is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: a.

The SCUa board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards must
be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

6.22.1 Functions of the SCUa Board


The SCUa board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between modules of the BSC6900.

The SCUa board performs the following functions:

l Provides the maintenance management function


l Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l Supports the port trunking function
l Supports the active/standby switchover
l Enables inter-subrack connections

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 173


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

l Provides a total switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s


l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.22.2 Panel of the SCUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUa board.
Figure 6-27 shows the panel of the SCUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 174


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-27 Panel of the SCUa board

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 175


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.22.3 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 6-80 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 6-80 LEDs on the SCUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

6.22.4 Ports on the SCUa Board


There are twelve 10/100/1000BASE-T ports, one COM port, one CLKIN port, and one
TESTOUT port on the SCUa board.
Table 6-81 describes the ports on the SCUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 176


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-81 Ports on the SCUa board

Port Function Connector


Type

10/100/100 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the inter- RJ45
0BASE-T0 subrack connection.
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T9

10/100/100 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are not RJ45
0BASE- used in the BSC6900.
T10 and
10/100/100
0BASE-
T11

COM The port does not require a signal cable or connection to RJ45
other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,
equipment security is not affected.

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 RJ45
kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for SMB male
testing. connector

6.22.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUa Board


The technical specifications of the SCUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capacity.

Table 6-82 describes the technical specifications of the SCUa board.

Table 6-82 Technical specifications of the SCUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 54.5 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 177


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 60 Gbit/s

Figure 6-28 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with
two SCUa boards.

Figure 6-28 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUa
boards

NOTE

If only one SCUa board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.

6.23 SCUb Board


SCUb is short for GE Switching network and Control Unit REV: b.
The SCUb board is mandatory. Two boards must be installed in the subrack. The boards must
be installed in slots 6 and 7 in the MPS/EPS/TCS.

NOTE

SCUa and SCUb boards cannot be simultaneously installed in slot 6 and slot 7 of the same subrack.
SCUa and SCUb boards can be simultaneously installed in two subracks of the same or different cabinets. For
example, two SCUa boards are installed in subrack 0, and two SCUb boards are installed in subrack 1.
The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb boards
inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling distance between two
subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be
connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 178


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

6.23.1 Functions of the SCUb Board


The SCUb board provides the maintenance management and GE switching platform for the
subrack in which it is located. Thus, the BSC6900 internal MAC switching is implemented and
the internal switching in turn enables complete connection between all modules of the
BSC6900.
The SCUb board performs the following functions:
l Provides the maintenance management function
l Provides configuration and maintenance of a subrack or of the entire BSC6900
l Monitors the power supply, fans, and environment of the cabinet
l Supports the port trunking function
l Supports the active/standby switchover
l Enables inter-subrack connections
l Provides a total switching capacity of 240 Gbit/s
l Distributes clock signals and RFN signals for the BSC6900

6.23.2 Panel of the SCUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the SCUb board.
Figure 6-29 shows the panel of the SCUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 179


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-29 Panel of the SCUb board

6.23.3 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 6-83 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 6-83 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 180


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

6.23.4 Ports on the SCUb Board


There are 15 ports on the SCUb board.
Table 6-84 describes the ports on the SCUb board.

Table 6-84 Ports on the SCUb board


Label Function Connector

10/100/100 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, used for the inter- RJ45
0BASE-T0 subrack connection.
to
10/100/100
0BASE-T5

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 181


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Label Function Connector

10/100/100 10 M/100 M/1000 M Ethernet ports, the two ports are not RJ45
0BASE-T6 used in the BSC6900.
and
10/100/100
0BASE-T7

10G-T8 to 10 Gbit/s Ethernet ports, used for the inter-subrack l When these
10G-T11 connection. ports are
l These ports can be interconnected using SFP+ High- interconnect
Speed cables. ed using
SFP+ High-
l These ports can be interconnected using multi-mode Speed
optical cables. cables, the
SFP+
connectors
are used.
l When these
ports are
interconnect
ed using
multi-mode
optical
cables, the
LC or PC
connectors
are used.

COM The port does not require a signal cable or connection to RJ45
other devices when the system runs properly. Therefore,
equipment security is not affected.

CLKIN Port for reference clock signal inputs, used to receive the 8 RJ45
kHz clock signals from the GCUa board.

TESTOUT Port for clock signal outputs. The clock signals are used for SMB male
testing. connector

6.23.5 Technical Specifications of the SCUb Board


The technical specifications of the SCUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and switching capability.

Table 6-85 describes the technical specifications of the SCUb board.

Table 6-85 Technical specifications of the SCUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 182


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Input Power Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Power consumption 78 W

Weight 1.5 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Switching capacity 240 Gbit/s

Figure 6-30 shows the switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with
two SCUb boards.

Figure 6-30 Switching bandwidth of each slot when the subrack is configured with two SCUb
boards

NOTE

If only one SCUb board is functioning in the subrack, the switching bandwidth of each slot reduces by half.
The switching bandwidth of a slot does not change when the SCUb boards are interconnected using SFP+ high-
speed cables or optical cables.

Table 6-86 describes the technical specifications of the optical ports.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 183


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Table 6-86 Specifications of the optical ports


Item Optical Transceiver, 10GE, Multi-Mode

Mode Multi mode

Connector type LC/PC

Center wavelength 850 nm

Operating data rate 10.3125 Gbit/s

Typical transmission distance 0.3 km

Max output optical power -1 dBm

Min output optical power -7.3 dBm

Saturation optical power -1 dBm

Receiver sensitivity -11.1 dBm

6.24 TNUa Board


TNUa refers to TDM switching Network Unit REV:a. The TNUa board is optional. In a
BSC6900 using the Abis over IP and A over IP mode, the TNUa boards do not need to be
configured. In a BSC6900 using other modes, install two TNUa boards in slots 4 and 5 of the
MPS, EPS, and TCS.

6.24.1 Functions of the TNUa Board


The TNUa board provides the TDM switching and serves as the switching center for the CS
services of the entire system.
The TNUa board performs the following functions:
l Provides 128K x 128K time slots TDM switching
l Allocates the TDM network resources

6.24.2 Panel of the TNUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the TNUa board.
Figure 6-31 shows the panel of the TNUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 184


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-31 Panel of the TNUa board

6.24.3 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 6-87 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 6-87 LEDs on the TNUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading


for 0.125s state.

ON There is power supply,


but the board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 185


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power


supply, or the board is
faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

6.24.4 Ports on the TNUa Board


There are six TDM ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-88 describes the ports on the TNUa board.

Table 6-88 Ports on the TNUa board

Port Function Connector Type

TDM0 to TDM5 TDM high-speed serial ports, DB14


used to connect the TNUa
boards in different subracks

NOTE

The BSC6900 supports the inter-TNUa connections between the MPS and the EPS. It also supports the
inter-TNUa connections between the TCSs.

6.24.5 Technical Specifications of the TNUa Board


The technical specifications of the TNUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity and processing capability.

Table 6-89 describes the technical specifications of the TNUa board.

Table 6-89 Technical specifications of the TNUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two inputs of -48 V DC working in active/


standby mode. The backplane of the subrack is
responsible for the power supply.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 186


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power consumption 31.20 W

Weight 1.00 kg

Temperature required when working for a 0°C to 45°C


long time

Temperature required when working for a -5°C to +55°C


short time

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 85%


for a long time

Relative humidity required when working 5% to 95%


for a short time

Processing capability One TNUa board provides 4K LVDS switching


capability for each slot in the subrack.
When two TNUa boards are installed in the
subrack, the switching capacity remains 4k
LVDS per slot.

6.25 XPUa Board


XPUa refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:a. The XPUa board is optional. Two to ten
XPUa boards can be installed in the MPS/EPS. For the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUa boards can be
installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed
in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUa boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l The XPUa board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.25.1 Functions of the XPUa Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUa board is functionally divided into main control XPUa
board and non-main control XPUa board. The main control XPUa board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUa board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUa board:
l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUa board serves as a main control XPUa board.
l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUa board serves as a non-main control XPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 187


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Main Control XPUa Board


The main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUa board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 3 of the main control XPUa board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUa Board


The non-main control XPUa board has four logical subsystems.
The four subsystems of the non-main control XPUa board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.25.2 Panel of the XPUa Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUa board.
Figure 6-32 shows the panel of the XPUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 188


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-32 Panel of the XPUa board

6.25.3 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-90 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 6-90 LEDs on the XPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 189


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.25.4 Ports on the XPUa Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-91 describes the ports on the XPUa board.

Table 6-91 Ports on the XPUa board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet RJ45


10/100/1000BASE-T3 ports

6.25.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUa Board


The technical specifications of the XPUa board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-92 describes the technical specifications of the XPUa board.

Table 6-92 Technical specifications of the XPUa board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 190


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power consumption 75.4 W

Weight 1.6 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 270 TRXs, 270 cells, 270 BTSs, and
XPUa board 492,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy Hour
Call Attempts)

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 360 TRXs, 360 cells, 360 BTSs, and
control XPUa board 656,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.26 XPUb Board


XPUb refers to eXtensible Processing Unit REV:b. The XPUb board is optional. Two to ten
XPUb boards can be installed in the MPS and in the EPS. For the MPS, the XPUb boards can
be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 11, slots 14 to 23, slots 26 to 27. For the EPS, the XPUb
boards can be installed in slots 0 to 3, slots 8 to 27.

NOTE

l If the OMUa/OMUb boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed
in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS.
l If the OMUc boards are not installed in slots 26 to 27 of the MPS, the XPUb boards can be installed in slots
26 to 27 of the MPS.
l The XPUb board cannot be configured in slot 24 or slot 25 of MPS.

6.26.1 Functions of the XPUb Board


Loaded with different software, the XPUb board is functionally divided into main control XPUb
board and non-main control XPUb board. The main control XPUb board is used to manage the
GSM user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources in the system
and process the GSM services on the control plane. The non-main control XPUb board is used
to process the GSM services on the control plane.

NOTE

Run the ADD BRD command to configure the logic function type of an XPUb board:
l If Logical function type is set to RGCP, the XPUb board serves as a main control XPUb board.
l If Logical function type is set to GCP, the XPUb board serves as a non-main control XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 191


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Main Control XPUb Board


The main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
Subsystem 0 of the main control XPUb board is the Main Processing Unit (MPU). It is used to
manage the user plane resources, control plane resources, and transmission resources of the
system. The functions are described as follows:
l Managing the user plane resources; managing the load sharing of the user plane resources
between subracks
l Maintaining the load of the control plane within the subrack; exchanging the load
information on the control planes between subracks
l Providing functions such as the logical main control function of the BSC6900, the IMSI-
RNTI maintenance and query, and the IMSI-CNid maintenance and query
l Forwarding the RRC connection request message to implement the sharing of user plane
resources and sharing of control plane resources in the BSC6900
Subsystems 1 to 7 of the main control XPUb board belong to the CPU for Service (CPUS), which
is used to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

Non-Main Control XPUb Board


The non-main control XPUb board has eight logical subsystems.
The eight subsystems of the non-main control XPUb board belong to the CPUS, which is used
to process the services on the control plane. The functions are described as follows:
l Processing upper-layer signaling over the A, Um, Abis, and Ater interfaces
l Processing transport layer signaling
l Allocating and managing the various resources that are necessary for service setup, and
establishing signaling and service connections
l Processing RFN signaling

6.26.2 Panel of the XPUb Board


There are LEDs and ports on the panel of the XPUb board.
Figure 6-33 shows the panel of the XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 192


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Figure 6-33 Panel of the XPUb board

6.26.3 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 6-93 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Table 6-93 LEDs on the XPUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 193


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

LED Color Status Description

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

6.26.4 Ports on the XPUb Board


There are four 10/100/1000BASE-T ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-94 describes the ports on the XPUb board.

Table 6-94 Ports on the XPUb board

Port Function Connector Type

10/100/1000BASE-T0 to 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet RJ45


10/100/1000BASE-T3 ports

6.26.5 Technical Specifications of the XPUb Board


The technical specifications of the XPUb board consist of the dimensions, power supply, power
consumption, weight, operating temperature, relative humidity, and board processing capability.

Table 6-95 describes the technical specifications of the XPUb board.

Table 6-95 Technical specifications of the XPUb board

Item Specification

Dimensions 248 mm x 32.3mm x 395.4 mm

Power supply Two -48 V DC working in active/standby mode.


The backplane of the subrack is responsible for
the power supply.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 194


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 6 Boards

Item Specification

Power consumption 52.3 W

Weight 1.2 kg

Operating temperature (long-term) 0°C to 45°C

Operating temperature (short-term) -5°C to +55°C

Relative humidity (long-term) 5% to 85%

Relative humidity (short-term) 5% to 95%

Processing capability of the main control Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and
XPUb board 1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs (Busy Hour
Call Attempts)

Processing capability of the non-main Supporting 640 TRXs, 640 cells, 640 BTSs, and
control XPUb board 1,050,000 Max equivalent BHCAs

NOTE

The preceding values are calculated on the basis of Huawei traffic model. In practice, the values can be
calculated on the basis of the actual traffic model.

6.27 WOPB Board


WOPB refers to Overvoltage Protection Board. It is configured in the common power
distribution box. Each common power distribution box is configured with one WOPB board.

6.27.1 Functions of the WOPB Board


The WOPB board provides the power surge protection function.
The WOPB board performs the following functions:
l Suppresses differential mode power surge
l Suppresses common mode power surge

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 195


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7 Cables

About This Chapter

This chapter describes all the cables used inside and outside the BSC6900 cabinet.

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal
power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.
7.2 PGND Cables
The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
7.3 Optical Cable
The optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame
(ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and the
number of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)
The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/
combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split
one input into two.
7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.
7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 196


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.
7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable
The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.
7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable
The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.
7.10 BITS Clock Cable
The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.
7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable
The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in the
EPS.
7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable
The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.
7.13 Straight-Through Cable
The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of
straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.
7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.
7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable
The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.
7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.
7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable
The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.
7.18 OMU serial cable

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 197


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.
7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable
The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.
7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable
The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 198


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.1 Power Cables


The power cables are mandatory and are of two categories: external power cables and internal
power cables. The power cables are the -48 V power cables and the RTN power cables.

The external power cables connect the Power Distribution Frame (PDF) to the power distribution
box at the top of the cabinet. The external power cables need to be installed on site. The internal
power cables connect the power distribution box to the modules inside the cabinet. The internal
power cables are installed before the cabinet is delivered.

Cabinet Configured with High-Power Power Distribution Box


Table 7-1 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the high-
power power distribution box. Table 7-2 and Table 7-3 describe the internal power cables when
the BSC6900 is configured with the high-power power distribution box.

Table 7-1 External power cables

Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 2-hole JG OT Four per cabinet


l -48 V terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port on DC output port
cable the power on the PDF
distribution box

Externa Black 25/35 2-hole JG OT Four per cabinet


l RTN terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port on DC output port
cable the power on the PDF
distribution box

Table 7-2 Internal power cables (1)

Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 10 OT OT Two per subrack


-48 V terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
DC DC input port DC output port
power on the power on the subrack
cable distribution
box

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 199


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Black 10 OT OT Two per subrack


RTN terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port DC output port
cable on the power on the subrack
distribution
box

Table 7-3 Internal power cables (2)

Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity


Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 2 OT D-type Two per independent


-48 V terminal/-48 V connector/ fan subrack
DC DC input port Power input
power on the power port on the
cable distribution independent
box fan subrack

Internal Black 2 OT D-type Two per independent


RTN terminal/-48 V connector/ fan subrack
power DC input port Power input
cable on the power port on the
distribution independent
box fan subrack

Figure 7-1 shows the external power cable.

Figure 7-1 External power cable

(1) OT terminal (2) 2-hole JG terminal

Figure 7-2 shows the internal power cable for subracks.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 200


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-2 Internal power cable for subracks

Figure 7-3 shows the internal power cable for the independent fan subrack.

Figure 7-3 Internal power cable for the independent fan subrack

Cabinet Configured with Common Power Distribution Box


Table 7-4 describes the external power cables when the BSC6900 is configured with the
common power distribution box. Table 7-5 describes the internal power cables when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box.

Table 7-4 External power cables


Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity
Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Externa Blue 25/35 Cord end OT Four per cabinet


l -48 V terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port on DC output port
cable the power on the PDF
distribution box

Externa Black 25/35 Cord end OT Four per cabinet


l RTN terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port on DC output port
cable the power on the PDF
distribution box

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 201


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-5 Internal power cables


Name Color Cross- Connector Connector Quantity
Sectional Type 1/ Type 2/
Area Installation Installation
Position 1 Position 2
mm2

Internal Blue 8 Cord end OT Two per subrack


-48 V terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
DC DC input port DC output port
power on the power on the subrack
cable distribution
box

Internal Black 8 Cord end OT Two per subrack


RTN terminal/-48 V terminal/-48 V
power DC input port DC output port
cable on the power on the subrack
distribution
box

The internal power cable and the external power cable have the same appearance when the
BSC6900 is configured with the common power distribution box. Figure 7-4 shows the external/
internal power cable.

Figure 7-4 External/Internal power cable

X1: Cord end terminal X2: OT terminal

7.2 PGND Cables


The PGND cables consist of external PGND cable, inter-cabinet PGND cables, PGND cable for
the power distribution box, PGND cables for the subrack, PGND cable for the independent fan
subrack, and PGND cables for the cabinet door. The PGND cable is mandatory.
Each cabinet must be configured with one external PGND cable. When the cabinets are
combined, three inter-cabinet PGND cables must be installed between every two adjacent
cabinets. Other PGND cables are already installed in the cabinet before delivery.
Table 7-6 describes the PGND cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 202


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-6 PGND cables


Cable Color Cross- Connect Connector Quantity
Name Sectional or Type Type 2/
Area 1/ Installation
Installati Position 2
mm2
on
Position
1

External Green and 25/35 OT OT terminal/ One per


PGND yellow terminal/ PGND output cabinet
cable Groundin port on the PDF
g bolt at
the top
rear of
each
cabinet

Inter- Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Three


cabinet yellow terminal/ PGND busbar of between
PGND PGND each cabinet every two
cable busbar of adjacent
each cabinets
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port One per


cable for yellow terminal/ for PGND cable power
the power PGND on the power distribution
distributio busbar of distribution box box
n box each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/Port Two per


cable for yellow terminal/ for the PGND subrack
the subrack PGND cable on the
busbar of subrack
each
cabinet

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ Eight per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding bolt cabinet
the cabinet Groundin on the cabinet
door g bolt on door
the base

PGND Green and 6 OT OT terminal/ One per


cable for yellow terminal/ Grounding point independent
the PGND of the fan subrack
independe busbar of independent fan
nt fan each subrack
subrack cabinet

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 203


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The PGND cable for the independent fan subrack is different from the other PGND cables for
the BSC6900. Figure 7-5 shows the PGND cable for the independent fan subrack. Figure 7-6
shows the other PGND cables.

Figure 7-5 PGND cable for the independent fan subrack

Figure 7-6 Other PGND cables

7.3 Optical Cable


The optical cable is used to connect the optical interface board to the Optical Distribution Frame
(ODF) or other NEs, or to interconnect SCUa boards. It is optional in the BSC6900 and the
number of optical cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Classification of the Optical Cable


According to the types of optical connectors at both ends of the cable, the optical cable can be
classified into the following types:
l LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-FC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
l LC/PC-SC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable
NOTE

l In actual installation, the LC/PC optical connector at one end of the cable is connected to the optical
interface board in the BSC6900, and the connector type at the other end of the cable depends on site
requirements.
l The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.). The SCUb
boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When the cabling
distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.), the SCUb boards
in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.
l The LC/PC-LC/PC single-mode/multi-mode optical cable connects the optical interface board to the
ODF or other NEs, or interconnects the optical interface boards.
l In practice, two optical cables form a pair. Both ends of each cable in the pair are attached with
temporary labels. If one end of the cable is connected to the TX port, the other end should be connected
to the RX port.

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical cable must be connected correctly. Otherwise, the optical
signals cannot be received or transmitted.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 204


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Appearance
Table 7-7 shows the optical cables used in the BSC6900.

Table 7-7 BSC6900 optical cables


Optical Cable Appearance
Type

LC/PC-LC/PC
single-mode/
multi-mode
optical cable

LC/PC-FC/PC
single-mode/
multi-mode
optical cable

LC/PC-SC/PC
single-mode/
multi-mode
optical cable

Installation
The optical cable has an LC/PC connector at one end connected to the optical interface board
in the BSC6900. The other end of the optical cable can use an LC/PC connector, SC/PC
connector, or FC/PC connector as required. Figure 7-7 shows the installation positions of the
optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 205


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-7 Installation positions of the optical cable

7.4 Optical Splitter/Combiner (Fiber Coupler)


The optical splitter/combiner is optional in the BSC6900. A maximum of 48 optical splitters/
combiners can be installed in a subrack to combine two inputs of optical signals into one or split
one input into two.

Function
The optical splitter/combiner splits or combines optical signals.
Figure 7-8 shows the operating principle of an optical combiner.

Figure 7-8 Operating principle of an optical combiner

Figure 7-9 shows the operating principle of an optical splitter.

Figure 7-9 Operating principle of an optical splitter

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 206


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

CAUTION
The TX end and RX end of each optical splitter/combiner must be correctly connected.
Otherwise, optical signals cannot be received or transmitted.

Appearance
Figure 7-10 shows the optical splitter/combiner.

Figure 7-10 Optical splitter/combiner

Classification
The optical splitter/combiner can be classified into the following types according to the mode
in which optical signals are transmitted:
l Single-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the single-mode optical splitter/
combinter is yellow.
l Multi-mode optical splitter/combiner: The optical fiber of the multi-mode optical splitter/
combiner is orange.

Application Scenario
When optical interface boards work in active/standby mode and optical transmission devices
work in independent mode, optical splitters/combiners can be used to improve the redundancy
performance of optical interface boards.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 207


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

CAUTION
Only the POUc board can be connected to an optical splitter/combiner.
The optical splitter/combiner cannot be used to solve any of the following problems:
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. When the
transmission on the TX optical fiber for the active optical port is interrupted, the BSC6900
reports a Multiplex Section (MS) Remote Defect Indication (RDI) alarm on the active and
standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active
and standby optical ports.
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The
transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the
TX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a MS RDI alarm on the active and
standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered between the active
and standby optical ports.
l The active and standby optical ports on BSC6900 interface boards are operational. The
transmission is interrupted on the optical fiber between the optical splitter/combiner and the
RX port on the peer equipment, and the BSC6900 reports a Loss of Signal (LOS) alarm on
the active and standby optical ports. An automatic switchover, however, is not triggered
between the active and standby optical ports.

Installation
Figure 7-11 shows the installation positions of optical splitters/combiners.

Figure 7-11 Installation positions of optical splitters/combiners

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 208


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.5 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 75-ohm coaxial
cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the active/standby
EIUa/PEUa board to the Digital Distribution Frame (DDF) or other NEs and transmits E1 trunk
signals.
The 75-ohm coaxial cable used in the BSC6900 has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the 75-ohm coaxial
cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All of the
16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.

Appearance
Figure 7-12 shows the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-12 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)
(3) Label (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 75-ohm coaxial cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a connector
to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the metal
case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-8 describes the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors
for the micro coaxial cables of the 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 209


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-8 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the micro coaxial cables
Pin of W1 Remarks Pin of W2 Remarks
DB44 DB44
Connec Signal Micro Connec Signal Micro
tor Coaxia tor Coaxia
l Cable l Cable
Identif Identif
ier ier

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

Table 7-9 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-8.

Table 7-9 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable
Signal Bearer

Ring shield layer of micro coaxial cables

Tip Core of micro coaxial cables

Installation
One end of the 75-ohm coaxial cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/PEUa
board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 210


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.6 Active/Standby 75-ohm Coaxial Cable


The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The number of
active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1
signals.

Appearance
The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has 2 x 8 cores. That is, the active/standby 75-ohm
coaxial cable is composed of two cables, each of which contains eight micro coaxial cables. All
of the 16 micro coaxial cables form eight E1 RX/TX links.
Figure 7-13 shows the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Figure 7-13 Active/Standby 75-ohm coaxial cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a coaxial cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of the
cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a coaxial cable)

The active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You need
to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-10 and Table 7-12 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 75-ohm coaxial cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 211


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-10 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4

X1 W3 Remark X1 W4 Remark
s s
Pin of Signal Micro Pin of Signal Micro
DB44 Coaxial DB44 Coaxial
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring 1 R1 15 Ring 1 T1

23 Tip 30 Tip

37 Ring 2 R2 14 Ring 2 T2

22 Tip 29 Tip

36 Ring 3 R3 13 Ring 3 T3

21 Tip 28 Tip

35 Ring 4 R4 12 Ring 4 T4

20 Tip 27 Tip

34 Ring 5 R5 11 Ring 5 T5

19 Tip 26 Tip

33 Ring 6 R6 10 Ring 6 T6

18 Tip 25 Tip

32 Ring 7 R7 9 Ring 7 T7

17 Tip 24 Tip

31 Ring 8 R8 8 Ring 8 T8

16 Tip 7 Tip

NOTE

In Table 7-10, T1 indicates the first-route E1 TX signal, and R1 indicates the first-route E1 RX signal.
Similarly, RN indicates the Nth-route E1 RX signal, and TN indicates the Nth-route E1 TX signal.

Table 7-11 describes the signals of the micro coaxial cables listed in Table 7-10.

Table 7-11 Bearers of the signals over the micro coaxial cable

Signal Bearer

Ring shield layer of coaxial cables

Tip Core of coaxial cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 212


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-12 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


W2 W1

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Remarks


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

NOTE

In Table 7-12, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of
the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable are connected
to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial
cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another NE through
transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cable can also be
connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-14 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 213


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-14 Installation positions of the active/standby 75-ohm coaxial cables

7.7 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of trunk cable. It is optional. The number of 120-ohm
twisted pair cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable connects the
active/standby EIUa/PEUa board to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-15 shows the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-15 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer of
the cable)
(3) Label (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Metal case of the DB44 connector

The 120-ohm twisted pair cable has a DB44 connector only at one end. You need to add a
connector to the other end according to the actual requirements.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 214


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Pin Assignment
The outer shield layer of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the BSC6900 by the
metal case of the DB44 connector. Table 7-13 describes the pin assignment of the DB44
connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-13 Pin assignment of the DB44 connector for the 120-ohm twisted pair cable
Pin of W1 Color Pin of W2 Color
DB44 DB44
Connec Signal 120- Connec Signal 120-
tor Ohm tor Ohm
Twisted Twisted
Pair Pair
Cable Cable
Identifie Identifie
r r

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/T- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/T+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/T- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/T+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/T- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/T+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/T- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/T+ White

34 Ring/R- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/R+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/R- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/R+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/R- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/R+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/R- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/R+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

Table 7-14 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-13.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 215


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-14 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable

Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for receiving E1/T1
signals

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/
T1 signals

Installation
One end of the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the E1/T1 electrical port on the EIUa/
PEUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the DDF or other NEs.

7.8 Active/Standby 120-ohm Twisted Pair Cable


The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable is a type of E1/T1 cable. It is optional. The
number of 120-ohm twisted pair cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable
connects the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards to the DDF or other NEs and transmits E1/
T1 signals.

Appearance
Figure 7-16 shows the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Figure 7-16 Active/Standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable

(1) DB44 connector (2) Metal case of the DB44 connector

(3) Label 1 (identifying a twisted pair cable) (4) Main label (identifying the code, version, and manufacturer
of the cable)

(5) Label 2 (identifying a twisted pair cable)

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 216


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

The active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable has two DB44 connectors only at one end. You
need to add connectors to the other end according to the actual requirements.
Table 7-15 and Table 7-17 describe the pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for the active/
standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable.

Table 7-15 Pin assignment of the DB44 connectors for W3 and W4


X1 W3 Color X1 W4 Color

Pin of Signal Twiste Pin of Signal Twiste


DB44 d Pair DB44 d Pair
Connec Cable Connec Cable
tor Identifi tor Identifi
er er

38 Ring/R- R1 Blue 15 Ring/R- T1 Blue

23 Tip/R+ White 30 Tip/R+ White

37 Ring/R- R2 Orange 14 Ring/R- T2 Orange

22 Tip/R+ White 29 Tip/R+ White

36 Ring/R- R3 Green 13 Ring/R- T3 Green

21 Tip/R+ White 28 Tip/R+ White

35 Ring/R- R4 Brown 12 Ring/R- T4 Brown

20 Tip/R+ White 27 Tip/R+ White

34 Ring/T- R5 Grey 11 Ring/T- T5 Grey

19 Tip/T+ White 26 Tip/T+ White

33 Ring/T- R6 Blue 10 Ring/T- T6 Blue

18 Tip/T+ Red 25 Tip/T+ Red

32 Ring/T- R7 Orange 9 Ring/T- T7 Orange

17 Tip/T+ Red 24 Tip/T+ Red

31 Ring/T- R8 Green 8 Ring/T- T8 Green

16 Tip/T+ Red 7 Tip/T+ Red

NOTE

In Table 7-15, R- and R+ stand for reception signals; T- and T+ stand for transmission signals.

Table 7-16 describes the bearers of the signals listed in Table 7-15.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 217


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-16 Bearers of the signals over the twisted pair cable
Signal Bearer

Ring/R- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
to the BSC6900

Tip/R+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals to the BSC6900

Ring/T- One core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1 signals
from the BSC6900

Tip/T+ The other core of the twisted pair cable for transmitting E1/T1
signals from the BSC6900

Table 7-17 Pin assignment of the connectors for W1 and W2


Twisted Pair Cable W2 Remarks Twisted Pair Cable W1 Remarks

Pin of X1 Pin of X2 Pin of X1 Pin of X2


Connector Connector Connector Connector

38 38 PAIR 15 15 PAIR

23 23 30 30

37 37 PAIR 14 14 PAIR

22 22 29 29

36 36 PAIR 13 13 PAIR

21 21 28 28

35 35 PAIR 12 12 PAIR

20 20 27 27

34 34 PAIR 11 11 PAIR

19 19 26 26

33 33 PAIR 10 10 PAIR

18 18 25 25

32 32 PAIR 9 9 PAIR

17 17 24 24

31 31 PAIR 8 8 PAIR

16 16 7 7

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 218


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

NOTE

In Table 7-17, PAIR indicates a pair of twisted pair cables, and Braid indicates the outer shield layer of
the twisted pair cable.

Installation
The two DB44 connectors at one end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cable are
connected to the active and standby EIUa/PEUa boards. The other end of the active/standby
120-ohm twisted pair cable is connected to the DDF in the equipment room and then to another
NE through transmission equipment. The other end of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair
cable can also be connected to another NE directly.
Figure 7-17 shows the installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables.

Figure 7-17 Installation positions of the active/standby 120-ohm twisted pair cables

7.9 Inter-TNUa Cable


The inter-TNUa cable is a type of signal cable. It is used to connect the TNUa boards that are
located in different subracks. It is optional. The number of inter-TNUa cables to be installed
depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-18 shows the inter-TNUa cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 219


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-18 Inter-TNUa cable

(1) DB14 (2) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables)


(3) Main label (identifying the code, version, and
manufacturer of the cable)

Installation
The two DB14 connectors at one end of the inter-TNUa cable are connected to the active and
standby TNUa boards in one subrack. The two DB14 connectors at the other end of the inter-
TNUa cable are connected to the active and standby TNUa boards in another subrack.
Figure 7-19 shows the installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 220


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-19 Installation positions of the inter-TNUa cables

7.10 BITS Clock Cable


The BITS clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of BITS clock
cables to be installed depends on site requirements. This cable transmits the BITS clock signals
to the GCUa board in the MPS. According to the impedance of the signal cables, the BITS clock
signal cables are classified into 75-ohm coaxial clock cables and 120-ohm clock conversion
cables.

Appearance
Figure 7-20 shows the 75-ohm coaxial clock cable.

Figure 7-20 75-ohm coaxial clock cable

(1) SMB connector (2) Label

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 221


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-21 shows the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Figure 7-21 120-ohm clock conversion cable

(1) SMB connector 2Label

NOTE

The 120-ohm clock conversion cable has two SMB connectors at one end. Only one SMB connector is
used, and the other SMB connector is bound to the wire bushing by using cable ties. Pay attention to the
connection when using the 120-ohm clock conversion cable.

Installation
One end of the BITS clock signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board. The other end of the cable is connected to the BITS clock source.
Figure 7-22 shows the installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables.

Figure 7-22 Installation positions of the BITS clock signal cables

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 222


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

7.11 Y-Shaped Clock Cable


The Y-shaped clock cable is a type of clock signal cable. It is optional. The number of Y-shaped
clock cables to be installed depends on the site requirements. This cable transmits the 8 kHz
clock signals from the GCUa or GCGa board in the MPS to the SCUa or SCUb board in the
EPS.

NOTE

The Y-shaped clock cable is not required if the BSC6900 is configured with only one MPS and no EPS.

Appearance
Figure 7-23 shows the Y-shaped clock cable.

Figure 7-23 Y-shaped clock cable

(1) Label (identifying a pair of twisted pair cables) (2) RJ45 connector

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the Y-shaped clock cable is connected to the SCUa or SCUb
board in the EPS. The two RJ45 connectors at the other end of the cable are connected to the
active and standby GCUa or GCGa boards in the MPS.
Figure 7-24 shows the installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 223


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-24 Installation positions of the Y-shaped clock cables

7.12 Line Clock Signal Cable


The line clock signal cable is optional. Two to four line clock signal cables can be installed to
transmit the line clock signals which are received from the interface board of the EPS to the
GCUa board.

NOTE

When the interface board providing line clock signals is located in the MPS, the line clock signals are sent
to the GCUa board through the backplane of the subrack. In this case, the line clock signal cable is not
required.

Appearance
Figure 7-25 shows the line clock signal cable.

Figure 7-25 Line clock signal cable

(1) SMB connector

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 224


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Installation
One end of the line clock signal cable is connected to the 2M0 or the 2M1 port on the interface
board. The other end of the signal cable is connected to the CLKIN0 or the CLKIN1 port on the
GCUa board.

7.13 Straight-Through Cable


The straight-through cable is of two types: the shielded straight-through cable and the unshielded
straight-through cable. The unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards
in different subracks. The shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/OMUa/
OMUc/FG2c board to other devices or the XPUa/XPUb board to the CBC. The number of
straight-through cables to be installed depends on the site requirements.

Appearance
Figure 7-26 shows the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-26 Shielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are shielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-through cable.

Figure 7-27 shows the unshielded straight-through cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 225


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-27 Unshielded straight-through cable

NOTE

X1 and X2 are unshielded RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the unshielded straight-through cable.

Pin Assignment
Table 7-18 describes the pins in the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the shielded straight-
through cable and the unshielded straight-through cable.

Table 7-18 Pins of the straight-through cable


X1 End Wire Color X2 End Wire Color

X1-1 White and orange X2-1 White and orange

X1-2 Orange X2-2 Orange

X1-3 White and green X2-3 White and green

X1-4 Blue X2-4 Blue

X1-5 White and blue X2-5 White and blue

X1-6 Green X2-6 Green

X1-7 White and brown X2-7 White and brown

X1-8 Brown X2-8 Brown

Installation
l When the unshielded straight-through cable is used to connect the SCUa boards in different
subracks, the RJ45 connectors at the two ends of the cable are connected to the SCUa boards
that are located in different subracks, as shown in Figure 7-28.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 226


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-28 Installation positions of the unshielded straight-through cables between the
SCUa boards in different subracks

l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the OMUa/OMUc board to
other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to ETH0 or ETH1
on the OMUa/OMUc board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is
connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d board
to other devices, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet
port on the FG2a/FG2c/FG2d board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable
is connected to the Ethernet port on the other devices.
l When the shielded straight-through cable is used to connect the XPUa/XPUb board to the
CBC, the RJ45 connector at one end of the cable is connected to an Ethernet port on the
XPUa/XPUb board, and the RJ45 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to
an Ethernet port on the CBC.

7.14 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Independent Fan


Subrack
The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack transmits monitoring signals to the
service subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-29 shows the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 227


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-29 Monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack

The monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack has a DB9 connector at one end
and a DB15 connector at the other end.
Table 7-19 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack.

Table 7-19 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.7 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.6 Tx-

X1.3 X2.3 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.2 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 GND -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shield layer.

Table 7-20 describes the signals listed in Table 7-19.

Table 7-20 Signals


Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 228


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack
is connected to the MONITOR 0 port on the independent fan subrack. The DB9 connector at
the other end of the cable is connected to the Monitor port on the bottom subrack.

NOTE

When a cabinet is configured with multiple subracks, you should configure the subracks from bottom to
top. Therefore, the monitoring signal cable for the independent fan subrack is always connected to the
bottom subrack in the cabinet.

7.15 Alarm Box Signal Cable


The alarm box signal cable is a type of signal cable available in different specifications. You
can choose one based on actual requirements. The alarm box signal cable is used to send the
alarm information to the alarm box for audible and visual display.

Appearance
The connectors of the alarm box signal cable are of two types: DB9 and DB25. The actual type
must be consistent with that in the Site Survey Report. The following takes an alarm box signal
cable with the DB9 connector as an example.

Figure 7-30 shows an alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-30 Alarm box signal cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-21 describes the pins of the alarm box signal cable.

Table 7-21 Pins of the alarm box signal cable

RJ45 DB9

3 5

5 2

6 3

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 229


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Installation
The RJ45 connector at one end of the alarm box signal cable is connected to the input serial port
on the alarm box. The DB9/DB25 connector at the other end of the cable is connected to the
serial port on the LMT.

Figure 7-31 shows the connection of the alarm box signal cable.

Figure 7-31 Connection of the alarm box signal cable

7.16 Monitoring Signal Cable for the Power Distribution


Box
The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box transmits monitoring signals from
the power distribution to the subracks through the independent fan subrack.

Appearance
Figure 7-32 shows the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Figure 7-32 Monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

The monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box has a DB9 connector at one end and
a DB15 connector at the other end.

Table 7-22 describes the pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 230


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Table 7-22 Pins of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box
Start End Description Remarks

X1.1 X2.3 Tx+ Twisted pair

X1.2 X2.2 Tx-

X1.3 X2.7 Rx+ Twisted pair

X1.4 X2.6 Rx-

X1.5 X2.5 RTN -

X1.SHELL X2.SHELL - X1.SHELL is


connected to
X2.SHELL through
the shield layer.

Table 7-23 describes the signals listed in Table 7-22.

Table 7-23 Signals


Signal Signal Description

Tx+ Positive phase signal transmitted

Tx- Negative phase signal transmitted

Rx+ Positive phase signal received

Rx- Negative phase signal received

Installation
The DB15 connector at one end of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box is
connected to the corresponding port on the power distribution box. The DB9 connector at the
other end of the cable is connected to the MONITOR 1 port on the independent fan subrack.
Figure 7-33 shows the installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power
distribution box.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 231


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-33 Installation position of the monitoring signal cable for the power distribution box

7.17 GPS Signal Transmission Cable


The GPS signal transmission cable is optional. It is used to transmit the GPS clock signals to
the GCGa board where the clock signals are processed and then provided for the system to use.

Appearance
Figure 7-34 shows the GPS signal transmission cable.

Figure 7-34 GPS signal transmission cable

X1: SMA male connector X2: N-type female connector X3: N-type male connector

Installation
Connect the N-type female connector of a 1-meter-long cable to the N-type male connector of
a 2.5-meter-long cable to join the two cables into a 3.5-meter-long GPS signal transmission
cable. The SMA male connector at one end of the GPS signal transmission cable is connected

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 232


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

to port ANT on the panel of the GCGa board. The N-type female connector at the other end of
the cable is connected to port Protect on the surge protector at the cabinet top.

7.18 OMU serial cable


The OMU serial cable is used to connect the OMU to the local maintenance terminal.

Appearance
Figure 7-35 shows the OMU serial cable.

Figure 7-35 OMU serial cable

Pin Assignment
Both ends of the OMU serial cable should use DB9 female connectors. Table 7-24 lists the pins
of the OMU serial cable.

Table 7-24 Pins of the OMU serial cable

DB9 DB9

2 3

3 2

5 5

Installation Position
One end of the OMU serial cable is connected to the COM serial port on the OMU. The other
end of the OMU serial cable is connected to the serial port on the local maintenance terminal.

NOTE
The OMU serial port cable is used for commissioning purpose only. It is not involved in routine installation.

7.19 EMU RS485 Communication Cable


The EMU RS485 communication cable is used to transmit signals between the BSC6900 and
the EMU.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 233


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Appearance
Figure 7-36 shows the RS485 communication cable.

Figure 7-36 RS485 communication cable

Pin Assignment
Table 7-25 describes the pins of the RS485 communication cable.

Table 7-25 Pins of the RS485 communication cable

RJ45 DB9

4 2

1 3

5 6

2 7

Installation
The DB9 male connector at one end of the RS485 communication cable is connected to the DB9
female connector on the environment monitoring device. The RJ45 connector at the other end
of the cable is connected to the J2 port on a high-capacity power distribution box or the COM1
port on a common power distribution box.

NOTE

One environment monitoring device is delivered with one RS485 signal cable (10 m) and one RS232 signal
cable (2 m). Choose one signal cable based on the actual requirements. The RS485 signal cable is
recommended. Use the Ethernet cable as a substitute if the length of the delivered signal cable is not
sufficient.

7.20 SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable connects the SCUb boards in different subracks.

Appearance
Figure 7-37 shows the SFP+ high-speed cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 234


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 7 Cables

Figure 7-37 SFP+ high-speed cable

Installation
Both ends of the SFP+ high-speed cable are connected to the 10G Ethernet ports on the SCUb
boards in different subracks.

Length of the SFP+ High-Speed Cable


The SFP+ high-speed cable has two length specifications: 3 m (9.84 ft.) and 10 m (32.80 ft.).
The SCUb boards inside the same cabinet are connected using the SFP+ high-speed cable. When
the cabling distance between two subracks in different cabinets is longer than 10 m (32.80 ft.),
the SCUb boards in the two subracks need to be connected using a multi-mode optical cable.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 235


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8 LEDs on the Boards

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the LEDs on the BSC6900 boards.

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board
There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board
There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board
Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board
There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 236


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board
There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board
There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.
8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board
There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board
There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board
There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board
There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board
There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.
8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.
8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board
There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board
Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 237


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.1 LEDs on the DPUa Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-1 describes the LEDs on the DPUa board.

Table 8-1 LEDs on the DPUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

8.2 LEDs on the DPUc Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUc board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-2 describes the LEDs on the DPUc board.

Table 8-2 LEDs on the DPUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 238


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or


it is abnormal.

8.3 LEDs on the DPUd Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUd board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-3 describes the LEDs on the DPUd board.

Table 8-3 LEDs on the DPUd board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF The board is functional.


for 1s

ON for 0.125s and The board is in loading state.


OFF for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it


is abnormal.

8.4 LEDs on the DPUf Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUf board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-4 describes the LEDs on the DPUf board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 239


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-4 LEDs on the DPUf board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it is


abnormal.

8.5 LEDs on the DPUg Board


There are three LEDs on the DPUg board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-5 describes the LEDs on the DPUg board.

Table 8-5 LEDs on the DPUg board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF The board is functional.


for 1s

ON for 0.125s and The board is in loading state.


OFF for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is functional.

OFF The board is loading software or it


is abnormal.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 240


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.6 LEDs on the EIUa Board


There are three LEDs on the EIUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-6 describes the LEDs on the EIUa board.

Table 8-6 LEDs on the EIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the board


is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.7 LEDs on the FG2a Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2a board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2a
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-7 describes the LEDs on the FG2a board.

Table 8-7 LEDs on the FG2a board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 241


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.8 LEDs on the FG2c Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2c board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2c
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-8 describes the LEDs on the FG2c board.

Table 8-8 LEDs on the FG2c board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 242


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.9 LEDs on the FG2d Board


Among all the LEDs on the FG2d board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the FG2d
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-9 describes the LEDs on the FG2d board.

Table 8-9 LEDs on the FG2d board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 243


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa Board


There are three LEDs on the panel of the GCUa/GCGa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-10 describes the LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board.

Table 8-10 LEDs on the GCUa/GCGa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The board is functional.


1s

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

8.11 LEDs on the GOUa Board


There are three LEDs on the GOUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.

Table 8-11 describes the LEDs on the GOUa board.

Table 8-11 LEDs on the GOUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 244


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

8.12 LEDs on the GOUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-12 describes the LEDs on the GOUc board.

Table 8-12 LEDs on the GOUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 245


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.13 LEDs on the GOUd Board


There are five types of LEDs on the GOUd board: RUN, ALM, ACT, LINK (optical port LED),
and ACT (optical port LED).
Table 8-13 describes the LEDs on the GOUd board.

Table 8-13 LEDs on the GOUd board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (optical Green ON The link is well connected.


port LED)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (optical Green OFF There is no data


port LED) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 246


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.14 LEDs on the MDMC Board


There are two LEDs on the MDMC board: RUN and ALM.

Table 8-14 describes the LEDs on the MDMC board.

Table 8-14 LEDs on the MDMC board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The MDMC board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The MDMC board is not working or it


for 0.25s does not communicate with the SCUa/
SCUb board properly.

OFF The power supply to the MDMC board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the MDMC
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8.15 LEDs on the OIUa Board


There are four LEDs on the OIUa board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-15 describes the LEDs on the OIUa board.

Table 8-15 LEDs on the OIUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the


board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 247


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFFLINE, and
HD.
Table 8-16 describes the LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board.

Table 8-16 LEDs on the OMUa/OMUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFFLINE Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 248


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written to.

8.17 LEDs on the OMUc Board


There are five types of LEDs on the OMUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, OFL, and HDD.
Table 8-17 describes the LEDs on the OMUc board.

Table 8-17 LEDs on the OMUc board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being started.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode, or the


board is disconnected.

OFL Blue ON The board can be removed.

OFF The board cannot be removed.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is being switched over to


for 0.125s the other working mode.

HDD Green OFF There is no read or write operation


on the hard disk.

Blinking The hard disk is being read or


written to.

8.18 LEDs on the PAMU Board


There are two LEDs on the PAMU board: RUN and ALM.
Table 8-18 describes the LEDs on the PAMU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 249


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-18 LEDs on the PAMU board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for The PAMU board is functional and
1s communicates with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

ON for 0.25s and OFF The PAMU board is faulty or it does not
for 0.25s communicate with the SCUa/SCUb
board properly.

OFF The power supply to the PAMU board


is abnormal or the power distribution
box does not work properly.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON The power distribution box is faulty.


During the self-check of the PAMU
board, however, the ALM LED is also
ON. This indicates that the ALM LED
is functional.

8.19 LEDs on the PEUa Board


There are three LEDs on the PEUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-19 describes the LEDs on the PEUa board.

Table 8-19 LEDs on the PEUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 250


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.20 LEDs on the POUc Board


There are four types of LEDs on the POUc board: RUN, ALM, ACT, and LOS.

Table 8-20 describes the LEDs on the POUc board.

Table 8-20 LEDs on the POUc board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading state.


0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LOS Green ON The STM-1 port does not receive


signals properly.

OFF The STM-1 port receives signals


properly.

8.21 LEDs on the SCUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.

Table 8-21 describes the LEDs on the SCUa board.

Table 8-21 LEDs on the SCUa board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 251


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

8.22 LEDs on the SCUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the SCUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the SCUb
board, LINK and ACT indicate the status of each 10M/100M/1000M Ethernet port, and 10G
LINK indicates the status of each 10G Ethernet port.

Table 8-22 describes the LEDs on the SCUb board.

Table 8-22 LEDs on the SCUb board

LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF for The board is in loading


0.125s state.

ON There is power supply, but


the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply,


or the board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 252


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

LED Color Status Description

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data


Ethernet port) transmission over the
Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission


over the Ethernet port.

10G LINK Green ON The link is well connected.

OFF The link is disconnected.

8.23 LEDs on the TNUa Board


There are three LEDs on the TNUa board: RUN, ALM, and ACT.
Table 8-23 describes the LEDs on the TNUa board.

Table 8-23 LEDs on the TNUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading


for 0.125s state.

ON There is power supply,


but the board is faulty.

OFF There is no power


supply, or the board is
faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active


mode.

OFF The board is in standby


mode.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 253


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

8.24 LEDs on the XPUa Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUa board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUa
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-24 describes the LEDs on the XPUa board.

Table 8-24 LEDs on the XPUa board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Green OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

8.25 LEDs on the XPUb Board


Among all the LEDs on the XPUb board, RUN, ALM, and ACT indicate the status of the XPUb
board, and other LEDs indicate the status of Ethernet ports. There are two LEDs at each Ethernet
port: LINK and ACT.
Table 8-25 describes the LEDs on the XPUb board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 254


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 8 LEDs on the Boards

Table 8-25 LEDs on the XPUb board


LED Color Status Description

RUN Green ON for 1s and OFF for 1s The board is functional.

ON for 0.125s and OFF The board is in loading state.


for 0.125s

ON There is power supply, but the board


is faulty.

OFF There is no power supply, or the


board is faulty.

ALM Red OFF There is no alarm.

ON or blinking There is a fault alarm.

ACT Green ON The board is in active mode.

OFF The board is in standby mode.

LINK (at the Green ON The link is well connected.


Ethernet port)
OFF The link is disconnected.

ACT (at the Orange OFF There is no data transmission over


Ethernet port) the Ethernet port.

Blinking There is data transmission over the


Ethernet port.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 255


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

9 DIP Switches on Components

About This Chapter

This chapter describes the DIP switches on the boards and subracks of the BSC6900.

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.
9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board
The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board
The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.
9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board
The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.
9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board
The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board
The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 256


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

9.1 DIP Switch on the Subrack


The DIP switch on a subrack is used to set the number of the subrack.

Location of the DIP Switch


The DIP switch is located on the lower back of the subrack. For details on the location of the
DIP switch, see 5.2 Components of the Subrack.

Appearance
Figure 9-1 shows the cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack.

Figure 9-1 Cover plate for the DIP switch on the subrack

Description about the DIP Switch


The DIP switch on the subrack has eight bits numbered in ascending order from 1 to 8. The
higher the bit is, the more significant it is. Table 9-1 describes the bits.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 257


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-1 Description about the bits

Bit Description

1-5 Bits 1 to 5 are used for setting the subrack number. Bit 1 is the
least significant bit. If the bit is set to ON, it indicates 0. If the bit
is set to OFF, it indicates 1.

6 Odd parity check bit

7 Reserved, undefined, generally set to ON

8 (the most significant Startup type of the subrack, the default value is OFF.
bit) NOTE
l For the inventory sites upgrading from BSC6000 to BSC6900, keep
the former settings.
l For the new sites in BSC6900, the bit is conservative and is fixed to
OFF.

CAUTION
l You must set the DIP switch before powering on the subrack. The setting after the power-
on is invalid.

Principle of the DIP Switch Setting


As the DIP switch uses odd parity check, the number of 1s in the eight bits must be an odd
number. The method for setting the bits is as follows:
1. Set bit 1 to bit 5 as required.
2. Set bit 7 to ON.
3. Set bit 8 to OFF.
4. Check the number of 1s in the seven bits of the DIP switch.
l If the number of 1s is even, set bit 6 to OFF.
l If the number of 1s is odd, set bit 6 to ON.

Table 9-2 describes the setting of the DIP switch in the case.

Table 9-2 Setting of the DIP switch

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 258


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Subr Bit Setting of the


ack DIP Switch
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

OFF ON ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

2 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1

ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON OFF

3 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF

4 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1

ON ON OF ON ON OFF ON OFF
F

5 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

OFF ON OF ON ON ON ON OFF
F

9.2 DIP Switches on the EIUa Board


The EIUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S1, S3, S4, S5, and S6.
Figure 9-2 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 259


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-2 Layout of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

NOTE

l When the 75-ohm coaxial cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1 unbalanced mode. In this
case, the TX end is grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to ON.
l When the 120-ohm twisted pair cable is used, the signal transmission uses the E1(T1) balanced mode.
In this case, the TX end is not grounded, that is, the corresponding bit of the DIP switch is set to OFF.
l All DIP switches of the EIUa board are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is faced to
and combined with the bottom plate, and so the DIP switches are hidden in between.

Table 9-3 describes the DIP switches on the EIUa board.

Table 9-3 Description of the DIP switches on the EIUa board

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75- Setting for


ohm Coaxial 120-ohm
Cable Twisted Pair
Cable

S1 8 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 0-7

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 260


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Switch Bit Description Setting for 75- Setting for


ohm Coaxial 120-ohm
Cable Twisted Pair
Cable

7 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s 8-15

6 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
16-23

5 Impedance ON OFF
selection switch
of E1s/T1s
24-31

1-4 Reserved - -

S3 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 0-7

S4 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 8-15

S5 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 16-23

S6 1-8 TX ground ON OFF


switch of E1s/
T1s 24-31

Table 9-4 describes the different DIP switches.

Table 9-4 Description of the different DIP switches


DIP Switch Description

E1/T1 impedance selection switch Used to select the logical transmission mode of the
board and to notify the software of the current
transmission mode

E1/T1 TX ground switch Used to control the grounding of the transmitting end
of the E1/T1 signals

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 261


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l The DIP switches are set for 75-ohm coaxial cables by default.
l The setting for the DIP switches on the active board must be the same as that for the DIP switches
on the standby board.
l The RX end is not grounded either in balanced or in unbalanced mode.

9.3 DIP Switch on the MDMC Board


The MDMC board provides an S2 DIP switch.

Figure 9-3 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the MDMC board.

Figure 9-3 DIP switch on the MDMC board

With four bits, the DIP switch S4 is used to set the address of the MDMC board.

To set the address, first remove the MDMC board and then set S2 as described in Table 9-5.

Table 9-5 DIP switch on the MDMC board

Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the MDMC board must be set as described in Table 9-5.

9.4 DIP Switch on the PAMU Board


The PAMU provides an SW1 DIP switch.

Figure 9-4 shows the layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 262


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-4 Layout of the DIP switch on the PAMU board

With four bits, the DIP switch SW1 is used to set the address of the PAMU board.
To set the address, first remove the PAMU board and then set the SW1 as described in Table
9-6.

Table 9-6 DIP switch on the PAMU board


Address Bit Setting of DIP Bit Description

0 1 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

In the BSC6900, the DIP switch on the PAMU board must be set as described in Table 9-6.

9.5 DIP Switches on the PEUa Board


The PEUa board provides five DIP switches, namely, S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10.
Figure 9-5 shows the layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 263


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-5 Layout of the DIP switches on the PEUa board

(1) Sub-board (2) Bottom plate

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 264


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

NOTE

l All DIP switches are on the front panel of the sub-board. The front panel is combined with the bottom
plate, so the DIP switches are not exposed.
l DIP switches S2, S4, S6, S8, and S10 are set from the side. As shown in Figure 9-5, there are two
square holes between DIP switches, one between S2 and S4, and the other between S8 and S6. Through
the two holes, you can set S2, S4, S8, and S6. DIP switch S10 is located in the right corner of the sub-
board, and therefore you can set S10 along the side. The direction of the arrow in Figure 9-5 is to turn
inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or S8 to ON, turn them inwards. To set the bits of S2, S4, S6, or
S8 to OFF, turn them outwards. To set the bits of S10 to ON, turn them outwards. To set the bits of
S10 to OFF, turn them inwards.
l You can also run the SET E1T1 command on the LMT to set S10. If there is any inconsistency between
the physical setting of S10 on the PEUa board and the setting of S10 by command, take the setting by
command as the criterion. By default, the working mode of S10 is set to E1. You can also run the SET
E1T1 command on the LMT to change the working mode of S10 from E1 mode to E1 balanced mode,
E1 unbalanced mode, or T1 mode. When you run the SET E1T1 command to set the support for
balanced and unbalanced modes parameter to No and set the working mode of S10 to E1, you must
also manually set the bits of S10 to set the working mode of S10 to E1 balanced mode or E1 unbalanced
mode.
l If signals are transmitted in E1 unbalanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and the TX end of the cable is grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to ON. If signals
are transmitted in E1(T1) balanced mode, the signals are transmitted through the 120-ohm twisted pair
cable and the TX end of the cable is not grounded, that is, the corresponding DIP bit is set to OFF.

DIP switches S2, S4, S6, and S8 on the PEUa board are used to enable or disable the grounding
of 0 to 31 E1s/T1s/J1s at the TX end. DIP switch S10 is used to set the working mode to E1
balanced mode, E1 unbalanced mode, T1 mode, or J1 mode. Table 9-7 describes the DIP
switches on the PEUa board.

Table 9-7 Description about DIP switches on the PEUa board

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

S2 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 24 to 31 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S4 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 16 to 23 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S6 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 0 to 7 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 265


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

DIP Bit Description Setting of DIP Meaning


Switc Switch
h

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S8 1-8 TX ground switch of ON Setting the


E1s/T1s/J1s 8 to 15 working mode to
E1 unbalanced
mode

OFF Setting the


working mode to
other modes

S10 1-2 DIP switch for setting the (ON, ON) Setting the
working mode, working mode to
consisting of two bits E1 unbalanced
mode

(OFF, ON) Setting the


working mode to
E1 balanced
mode

(ON, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
T1 mode

(OFF, OFF) Setting the


working mode to
J1 mode

9.6 DIP Switch on the PFCU Board


The PFCU board has one DIP switch, which is named SW1 and consists of four bits. The DIP
switch is used to set the address of the PFCU board. When the PFCU board is configured in a
fan box of the service subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 1. When the PFCU board
is configured in the independent fan subrack, the address of the PFCU board is set to 4.

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in a Fan Box of the service subrack)
Figure 9-6 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 266


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Figure 9-6 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-8. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After setting the DIP
switch, the address of the PFCU board is 1.

Table 9-8 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in a fan box of the service subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant OFF 1


bit)

2 ON 0

3 ON 0

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

DIP Switch on the PFCU Board (in the Independent Fan Subrack)
Figure 9-7 shows the DIP switch on the PFCU board.

Figure 9-7 DIP switch on the PFCU board

To set the address of the PFCU board, remove the fan box, and then set SW1 as described in
Table 9-9. For how to remove the fan box, see Replacing the Fan Box. After the setting, the
address of the PFCU board is 4.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 267


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
BSC6900 GSM
Hardware Description 9 DIP Switches on Components

Table 9-9 DIP switch on the PFCU board (in the independent fan subrack)
DIP Switch Bit Setting of DIP Description
Switch

SW1 1 (the least significant ON 0


bit)

2 ON 0

3 OFF 1

4 (the most significant ON 0


bit)

NOTE

The DIP switch on the PFCU board of the BSC6900 must be set according to the preceding descriptions.

Issue 09 (2013-05-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 268


Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

You might also like